EP4649727A1 - Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment - Google Patents

Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment

Info

Publication number
EP4649727A1
EP4649727A1 EP24714070.0A EP24714070A EP4649727A1 EP 4649727 A1 EP4649727 A1 EP 4649727A1 EP 24714070 A EP24714070 A EP 24714070A EP 4649727 A1 EP4649727 A1 EP 4649727A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
configuration
ltm
implementations
cell
message
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
EP24714070.0A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Inventor
Chih-Hsiang Wu
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Google LLC
Original Assignee
Google LLC
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Google LLC filed Critical Google LLC
Publication of EP4649727A1 publication Critical patent/EP4649727A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • H04W36/0085Hand-off measurements
    • H04W36/0088Scheduling hand-off measurements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • H04W36/0085Hand-off measurements

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to wireless communications and, more particularly, to managing mobility, i.e., a serving cell change, using a control signaling of a protocol layer lower than a radio resource control (RRC) protocol layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) sublayer of the radio protocol stack provides services such as transfer of user-plane data, ciphering, integrity protection, etc.
  • the PDCP layer defined for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) radio interface (see 3GPP technical specification (TS) 36.323) and New Radio (NR) (see 3GPP TS 38.323) provides sequencing of protocol data units (PDUs) in the uplink direction (from a user device, also known as a user equipment (UE), to a base station) as well as in the downlink direction (from the base station to the UE).
  • EUTRA Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
  • NR New Radio
  • the PDCP sublayer provides signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs) to the Radio Resource Control (RRC) sublayer.
  • SRBs signaling radio bearers
  • DRBs data radio bearers
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the UE and a base station use SRBs to exchange RRC messages as well as non-access stratum (NAS) messages, and can use DRBs to transport data on a user plane.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • UEs use several types of SRBs and DRBs.
  • DC dual connectivity
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • SRB1 resources carry RRC messages, which in some cases include NAS messages over the dedicated control channel (DCCH), and SRB2 resources support RRC messages that include logged measurement information or NAS messages, also over the DCCH but with lower priority than SRB1 resources. More generally, SRB1 and SRB2 resources allow the UE and the MN to exchange RRC messages related to the MN and embed RRC messages related to the SN.
  • the SRB1 and SRB 2 resources can be referred to as MCG SRBs.
  • SRB3 resources allow the UE and the SN to exchange RRC messages related to the SN and can be referred to as SCG SRBs.
  • Split SRBs allow the UE to exchange RRC messages directly with the MN via lower layer resources of the MN and the SN.
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the MN can be referred as MCG DRBs
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the SN can be referred as SCG DRBs
  • DRBs using the lower-layer resources of both the MCG and the SCG can be referred to as split DRBs.
  • the UE in some scenarios, concurrently utilizes resources of multiple radio access network (RAN) nodes (e.g., base stations or components of a distributed base station), interconnected by a backhaul.
  • RAN radio access network
  • RATs radio access technologies
  • this type of connectivity is referred to as Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity (MR-DC).
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • PSCell primary secondary cell
  • the UE communicates with the MN (via the PCell) and the SN (via the PSCell).
  • the UE utilizes resources of one base station at a time.
  • One base station and/or the UE determines that the UE should establish a radio connection with another base station. For example, one base station determines to hand the UE over to the second base station and initiate a handover procedure.
  • the RAN should configure the UE for a serving cell change.
  • the RAN configures the UE to transmit Layer 3 (L3) measurement results.
  • L3 measurement results received from the UE, the RAN transmits an RRC reconfiguration message, configuring Reconfiguration with Synchronization (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message includes a ReconfigurationWithSync IE) for the change of the serving cell (e.g., PCell or PSCell).
  • the RAN releases the at least one SCell due to the change of the PCell or PSCell.
  • the serving cell change involves complete L2 (and LI) resets, leading to longer latency, larger overhead, and longer interruption time.
  • L2 and LI
  • An example embodiment of the techniques of this disclosure is a method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration; and communicating, at the UE, with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • RAN radio access network
  • DU distributed unit
  • CU serving centralized unit
  • LTM reference lower layer triggered mobility
  • Another example embodiment of these techniques is a method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) configuration; and releasing, at the UE and in response to transitioning to an inactive state or an idle state, the reference LTM configuration.
  • RAN radio access network
  • DU distributed unit
  • CU serving centralized unit
  • LTM reference lower layer triggered mobility
  • Another example embodiment of these techniques is an apparatus, operating as a user equipment (UE), comprising processing hardware and configured to implement the methods above.
  • UE user equipment
  • Fig. 1A is a block diagram of an example system in which a radio access network (RAN) and a user device can implement the techniques of this disclosure for managing conditional procedures related to a secondary node (SN);
  • Fig. IB is a block diagram of an example base station including a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) that can operate in the system of Fig. 1 A;
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • Fig. 2A is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with base stations;
  • Fig. 2B is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with a CU and a DU;
  • FIG. 3 is a messaging diagram of an example scenario where a CU provides a reference lower layer triggered mobility configures to a DU for generating a configuration for a UE;
  • Fig. 4 is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the base station includes a source DU (S-DU) and target DU (T-DU);
  • S-DU source DU
  • T-DU target DU
  • Fig. 5A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the UE communicates in DC with an MN and an SN;
  • Fig. 5B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 5A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the MN;
  • FIG. 6A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an S-DU and a T-DU in the SN;
  • Fig. 6B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 6A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the MN;
  • Fig. 7A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an M-DU and an S-DU;
  • Fig. 7B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 7A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the M-DU;
  • Fig. 8A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an M-DU, an S-DU, and a T-DU;
  • Fig. 8B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 8A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the M-DU;
  • FIG. 9 is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE receives a reference LTM DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration(s) for communicating with a RAN;
  • Fig. 10A is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to update a reference LTM configuration with a second LTM configuration based on whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference DU or CU configuration;
  • Fig. 10B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference LTM DU or CU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU or CU configuration;
  • Fig. 10C is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference DU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration;
  • Fig. 10D is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference CU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration;
  • FIG. 11 is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to replace or modify a first reference LTM CU configuration and/or a first reference DU configuration based on whether the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU or DU configuration;
  • Fig. 13B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 103, but in which the UE makes the determination based on whether the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration;
  • Fig. 14B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 14A, but in which the UE releases the reference LTM configurations in response to transitioning to the idle state and retains the reference LTM configurations in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
  • Fig. 1A depicts an example wireless communication system 100 in which communication devices can implement these techniques.
  • the wireless communication system 100 includes a UE 102, a base station (BS) 104, a base station 106 and a core network (CN) 110.
  • the UE 102 initially connects to the base station 104.
  • the base station 104 can perform an SN addition to configure the UE 102 to operate in dual connectivity (DC) with the base station 104 and the base station 106.
  • the base stations 104 and 106 operate as an MN and an SN for the UE 102, respectively.
  • the base station 104 can be implemented as a master eNB (MeNB) or a master gNB (MgNB), and the base station 106 can be implemented as a secondary gNB (SgNB).
  • the UE 102 can communicate with the base station 104 and the base station 106 via the same RAT such as EUTRA or NR, or different RATs.
  • the base station 104 is an MeNB and the base station 106 is a SgNB
  • the UE 102 can be in EUTRA-NR DC (EN-DC) with the MeNB and the SgNB.
  • an MeNB or an SeNB is implemented as an ng-eNB rather than an eNB.
  • the UE 102 can be in next generation (NG) EUTRA-NR DC (NGEN-DC) with the Mng-eNB and the SgNB.
  • NG next generation
  • NGEN-DC next generation
  • the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is an SgNB
  • the UE 102 may be in NR-NR DC (NR-DC) with the MgNB and the SgNB.
  • NR-DC NR-NR DC
  • the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is a Secondary ng-eNB (Sng-eNB)
  • the UE 102 may be in NR-EUTRA DC (NE-DC) with the MgNB and the Sng-eNB.
  • NE-DC NR-EUTRA DC
  • a core network (CN) 110 can be an evolved packet core (EPC) 111 or a fifthgeneration core (5GC) 160, both of which are depicted in Fig. 1A.
  • the base station 104 can be an eNB supporting an SI interface for communicating with the EPC 111, an ng-eNB supporting an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160, or a gNB that supports an NR radio interface as well as an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160.
  • the base stations 104 and 106 can support an X2 or Xn interface.
  • the base station 104 supports cell 124A, and the base station 106 supports a cell 126.
  • the cells 124A and 126 can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, where one of the base stations 104 and 106 is an MN and the other is an SN.
  • the base station 104 can support additional cell(s) such as cells 124B and 124C, and the base station 106 can support additional cell(s) (not shown in Fig. 1A).
  • the cells 124A, 124B and 124C can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in carrier aggregation (CA) with the base station 104.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the base station 104 can operate the cells 124A, 124B and 124C via one or more transmit and receive points (TRPs). More particularly, when the UE 102 is in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, one of the base stations 104 and 106 operates as an MeNB, an Mng-eNB or an MgNB, and the other operates as an SgNB or an Sng-eNB.
  • TRPs transmit and receive points
  • the wireless communication network 100 can include any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. More particularly, the EPC 111 or the 5GC 160 can be connected to any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. Although the examples below refer specifically to specific CN types (EPC, 5GC) and RAT types (5G NR and EUTRA), in general the techniques of this disclosure also can apply to other suitable radio access and/or core network technologies such as sixth generation (6G) radio access and/or 6G core network or 5G NR-6G DC.
  • 6G sixth generation
  • the base station 104 is equipped with processing hardware 130 that can include one or more general-purpose processors (e.g., CPUs) and a non-transitory computer-readable memory storing instructions that the one or more general-purpose processors execute. Additionally or alternatively, the processing hardware 130 can include special-purpose processing units.
  • the processing hardware 130 can include a PHY controller 132 configured to transmit data and control signal on physical downlink (DL) channels and DL reference signals with one or more user devices (e.g. UE 102) via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • DL physical downlink
  • UE 102 user devices
  • cells e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C
  • the PHY controller 132 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical uplink (UL) channels and/or UL reference signals with the one or more user devices via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the processing hardware 130 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 134 configured to perform MAC functions with one or more user devices.
  • the MAC functions includes a random access (RA) procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and/or communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the one or more user devices.
  • the processing hardware 130 can further include an RRC controller 136 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
  • the RRC controller 132 may be configured to support RRC messaging associated with handover procedures, and/or to support the necessary operations when the base station 104 operates as an MN relative to an SN or as an SN relative to an MN.
  • the base station 106 can include processing hardware 140 that is similar to processing hardware 130.
  • components 142, 144, and 146 can be similar to the components 132, 134, and 136, respectively.
  • the UE 102 is equipped with processing hardware 150 that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the PHY controller 152 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical DL channels and/or DL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the PHY controller 152 is also configured to transmit data and control signal on physical UL channels and/or UL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs.
  • the processing hardware 150 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 154 configured to perform MAC functions with base station 104 or 106. Lor example, the MAC functions include a random access procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the base station 104 or 106.
  • the processing hardware 150 can further include an RRC controller 156 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
  • the UE 102 in DC can use a radio bearer (e.g., a DRB or an SRB) that at different times terminates at the MN 104 or the SN 106.
  • the UE 102 can apply one or more security keys when communicating on the radio bearer, in the uplink (UL) (from the UE 102 to a base station) and/or downlink (from a base station to the UE 102) direction.
  • Fig. IB depicts an example distributed implementation of a base station such as the base station 104 or 106.
  • the base station in this implementation can include a centralized unit (CU) 172 and one or more distributed units (DUs) 174.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DUs distributed units
  • the CU 172 is equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 130.
  • the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 140.
  • the processing hardware 140 in an example implementation includes an SN RRC controller 142 configured to manage or control one or more RRC configurations and/or RRC procedures when the base station 106 operates as an SN.
  • the DU 174 is also equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units.
  • the processing hardware in an example implementation includes a medium access control (MAC) controller configured to manage or control one or more MAC operations or procedures (e.g., a random access procedure) and a radio link control (RLC) controller configured to manage or control one or more RLC operations or procedures when the base station 106 operates as an MN or an SN.
  • the process hardware may include further a physical layer controller configured to manage or control one or more physical layer operations or procedures.
  • FIG. 2A illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 200 according to which the UE 102 can communicate with an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB (e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106).
  • an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106.
  • a physical layer (PHY) 202A of EUTRA provides transport channels to the EUTRA MAC sublayer 204A, which in turn provides logical channels to the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A.
  • the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A in turn provides RLC channels to an EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and, in some cases, to an NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the NR PHY 202B provides transport channels to the NR MAC sublayer 204B, which in turn provides logical channels to the NR RLC sublayer 206B.
  • the NR RLC sublayer 206B in turn provides data transfer services to the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the NR PDCP sublayer 210 in turn can provide data transfer services to Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) 212 or a radio resource control (RRC) sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A).
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the UE 102 in some implementations, supports both the EUTRA and the NR stack as shown in Fig. 2A, to support handover between EUTRA and NR base stations and/or to support DC over EUTRA and NR interfaces. Further, as illustrated in Fig. 2A, the UE 102 can support layering of NR PDCP 210 over EUTRA RLC 206 A, and SDAP sublayer 212 over the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 receive packets (e.g., from an Internet Protocol (IP) layer, layered directly or indirectly over the PDCP layer 208 or 210) that can be referred to as service data units (SDUs), and output packets (e.g., to the RLC layer 206A or 206B) that can be referred to as protocol data units (PDUs). Except where the difference between SDUs and PDUs is relevant, this disclosure for simplicity refers to both SDUs and PDUs as “packets.”
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • PDUs protocol data units
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide signaling radio bearers (SRBs) or RRC sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A) to exchange RRC messages or non-access-stratum (NAS) messages, for example.
  • SRBs signaling radio bearers
  • RRC sublayer not shown in Fig. 2A
  • NAS non-access-stratum
  • the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) to support data exchange.
  • Data exchanged on the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can be SDAP PDUs, Internet Protocol (IP) packets or Ethernet packets.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • Fig. 2B illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 250, which the UE 102 can communicate with a DU (e.g., DU 174) and a CU (e.g., CU 172).
  • the radio protocol stack 200 is functionally split as shown by the radio protocol stack 250 in Fig. 2B.
  • the CU at any of the base stations 104 or 106 can hold all the control and upper layer functionalities (e.g., RRC 214, SDAP 212, NR PDCP 210), while the lower layer operations (e.g., NR RLC 206B, NR MAC 204B, and NR PHY 202B) are delegated to the DU.
  • NR PDCP 210 provides SRBs to RRC 214
  • NR PDCP 210 provides DRBs to SDAP 212 and SRBs to RRC 214.
  • event 316 is similar to event 416 of Figs 4A and 4B, event 516 of Fig. 5A, event 517 of Fig. 5B, event 616 of Fig. 6A, event 617 of Fig. 6B, event 716 of Fig. 7A, and event 717 of Fig. 7B), with differences discussed below where appropriate.
  • event 316 is similar to event 416 of Figs 4A and 4B, event 516 of Fig. 5A, event 517 of Fig. 5B, event 616 of Fig. 6A, event 617 of Fig. 6B, event 716 of Fig. 7A, and event 717 of Fig. 7B
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174 and the DU 174 operates the cell 124A.
  • the UE 102 initially communicates 302 with the DU 174 on the cell 124A using a serving DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 (e.g., using a serving CU configuration).
  • the UE 102 in carrier aggregation (CA) communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., cell 124D not shown in Fig. 1A) using the serving DU configuration.
  • the DU 174 operates the other cell(s).
  • the UE 102 in communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A only. In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the cell 124A is a PCell. In such cases, the other cell(s) include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or an SCell. In other implementations, the cell 124A is an SCell, and one of the other cell(s) is a PCell. In such cases, the rest of the cells include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or an SCell.
  • the base station 104 is the DU 174, the CU 172, or the DU 174 and CU 172.
  • the UE 102 transmits UL PDUs and/or UL control signals to the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the base station 104 via radio bearers which include SRBs and/or DRB(s).
  • the base station 104 configures the radio bearers for the UE 102.
  • UL control signals include UL control information, channel state information, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements (ACKs), HARQ negative ACKs, scheduling request(s), and/or sounding reference signal(s).
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • ACKs hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgements
  • HARQ negative ACKs scheduling request(s)
  • the UE 102 receives DL PDUs and/or DL control signals from the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • the DL control signals include downlink control information (DCIs) and reference signals (e.g., synchronization signal block, channel state information reference signal(s) (CSI-RS(s)), and/or tracking reference signal(s)).
  • the base station 104 transmits the DCIs on physical downlink control channel(s) (PDCCH(s)) monitored by the UE 102, on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs.
  • PDCCH(s) physical downlink control channel(s)
  • the serving DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters.
  • the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters to the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 generates one or more messages (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the configuration parameters and transmits the one or more messages to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters to the UE 102 directly.
  • the serving DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • the serving DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the serving CU configuration includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters.
  • the serving CU configuration includes a MeasConfig IE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331) or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConfig IE.
  • the serving DU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
  • the serving CU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
  • the UE 102 receives the serving CU configuration or the configuration parameters in the serving CU configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174. In other implementations, the UE 102 receives a portion of the serving CU configuration and/or a portion of the serving DU configuration from a base station other than the base station 104 and the remaining portion of these configuration parameters from the base station 104.
  • the UE 102 While communicating with the base station 104, the UE 102 transmits 304 at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement report includes Layer 1 (LI) measurement report(s) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurement report(s) for at least one serving cell of the UE 102 and/or at least one nonserving cell.
  • the DU 174 transmits 306 a DU-to- CU message including the L3 measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the DU-to-CU message(s) of the event 306 is/are Fl application protocol (F1AP) message(s) (e.g., UL RRC Message Transfer message(s)).
  • Fl application protocol F1AP
  • the DU 174 does not transmit or refrains from transmitting the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
  • the at least one serving cell includes the cell 124A and/or other cell(s), and the at least one nonserving cell includes the cell 124B and/or cell 124C.
  • the serving DU configuration or the serving CU configuration includes at least one measurement configuration.
  • the UE 102 receives one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements and transmits 304 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)) and/or LI measurement configuration(s).
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) e.g., CSl-MeasConfig IE(s)
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) configure resources of reference signal(s) (e.g., CSLRS(s)) for the UE 102 to measure and obtain LI measurement results.
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) is/are CS1- ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) configure way(s) the UE 102 uses to transmit LI measurement results/reports.
  • the LI measurement report configuration(s) is/are CSl-ReportConfig IE(s).
  • the UE 102 transmits the L3 measurement report(s) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 in accordance with the L3 measurement configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the LI measurement configuration(s) or LI measurement reporting configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for a lower layer triggered mobility (LTM).
  • the LI measurement resource configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for the LTM.
  • the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for the LTM.
  • the UE 102 For each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, in some implementations. That is, the UE 102 transmits the each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUCCH to the DU 174. In other implementations, for each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. That is, the UE 102 transmits each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 transmits a portion of the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) and the rest of the LI measurement report(s) on physical UL shared channel(s) (PUSCH(s)) to the DU 174. That is, for each portion of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, and for each of the remainder of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174.
  • each of the LI measurement report(s) Is a part of the channel state information (CSI) (i.e., a CSI component) or CSI.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the UE 102 includes other CSI component(s) in (each of) the PUCCH transmission(s) and/or PUSCH transmission(s) described above.
  • the other CSI component(s) include a channel quality indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), a CSLRS Resource Indicator (CRI), a Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Block Indicator (SSBRI), a Layer Indicator (LI), and/or a Rank Indicator (RI).
  • the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in the format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 transmits a MAC control element (CE), including the measurement report, to the DU 174 in the event 304.
  • a MAC control element CE
  • the UE 102 generates one or more MAC PDUs, each including one or more of the MAC CE(s), to the DU 174 in the event 304.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals in accordance with the at least one measurement configuration.
  • the one or more reference signals include one or more Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Blocks (SSBs) and/or one or more CSI-RSs.
  • the UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements.
  • the DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., the cell 124B, the cell 124C, and/or cell(s) not shown in Fig. 1A).
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell qualifies to be a candidate cell that could be used for communication with the UE 102. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A, and/or is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A by a first predetermined threshold, the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measure report is received from the UE 102 or not.
  • the CU 172 transmits 308 a first CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes a cell identity (ID) of the first cell in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the cell ID is cell global identity (CGI).
  • the cell ID is a portion of the CGI.
  • the cell ID is a physical cell ID (PCI).
  • the DU 174 In response to the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 generates a first LTM DU configuration (referred to hereinafter as LTM DU configuration 1) for the UE 102, which configures the first cell for LTM.
  • the DU 174 transmits 310 a first DU-to-CU message, including the LTM DU configuration 1, to the CU 172 in response to the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 together with the LTM DU configuration 1 in an IE of the first DU-to-CU message to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is associated with the first cell (i.e., the cell ID 1).
  • the DU 174 initiates transmission of the first DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 instead of in response to a CU-to-DU message received from the CU 172.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the cell ID of the first cell associated with the LTM DU configuration 1 to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell.
  • the CU 172 identifies that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell.
  • the CU 172 includes additional cell ID(s) (e.g., cell ID(s) 2, ..., N) in the first CU-to-DU message to prepare additional cell(s) (e.g., cell(s) 2, ..., N) for LTM for the UE 102, and the DU 174 includes additional LTM DU configuration(s) (e.g., LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N), each configuring a particular cell of the additional cell(s), as described below.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the additional cell ID(s) respectively associated with the additional LTM DU configuration(s) to indicate which LTM DU configuration is associated to which cell (ID).
  • the CU 172 does not include a (reference) LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N (i.e., non-reference LTM DU configuration(s)) based on the reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP specification 38.331).
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and/or reporting.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the serving DU configuration.
  • a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving DU configuration, and the rest of the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the rest of the serving DU configuration.
  • the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as the serving DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 After receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates an RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., an RRCReconfiguration message), including the LTM DU configuration 1, and transmits 316 a second CU-to-DU message including the RRC reconfiguration message to the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, the CU 172 does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 if the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration to the UE 102 during the event 302, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, if the CU 172 receives the reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Otherwise, if the CU 172 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first container (e.g., a field/IE) and includes the first container (e.g., LTM configuration 1) in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316 and 318. In such cases, the CU 172 generates the first container.
  • the first container functions to indicate to the UE 102 not to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 immediately.
  • the UE 102 receives an RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 318) including a configuration (e.g., the LTM DU configuration 1).
  • the UE 102 refrains from immediately applying the configuration. Otherwise, in further implementations, if the configuration is not included in the first container, the UE 102 applies the configuration immediately.
  • the first container is a first addition or modification list (e.g., Itm- ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm- CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddModList IE).
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first element (referred to hereinafter as element 1) of the first addition or modification list.
  • the element 1 is an addition or modification IE (Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM- ConfigToAddMod IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddMod IE).
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 receives the first addition or modification list, the UE 102 stores the first addition or modification list (e.g., in a variable in the random access memory (RAM)).
  • the DU 174 generates the first container and includes the first container in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the DU 174 generates the element 1 and includes the element 1 in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the first container or the element 1, a LTM CU configuration 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the second container, LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes, in the element(s) 2, ..., N, the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 does not include, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, LTM CU configuration(s) for some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 transmits 318 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 transmits 320 an RRC reconfiguration complete message (e.g., an RRCReconfigurationComplete message) to the DU 174, which in turn transmits 322 a second DU-to-CU message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 performs security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the CU 172 generates a message authentication code for integrity (MAC-I) for the RRC reconfiguration message, encrypts the RRC reconfiguration message and the MAC-I to obtain an encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and an encrypted MAC-I, and transmits a PDCP PDU including the encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and encrypted MAC-I to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the events 316 and 318.
  • MAC-I message authentication code for integrity
  • the UE 102 determines whether the MAC-I is invalid or ignores the RRC reconfiguration message. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs an RRC connection reestablishment procedure in response to the invalid MAC-I. Otherwise, in further implementations, if the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is valid, the UE 102 processes the RRC reconfiguration. The UE 102 refrains from applying (i.e., executing) the LTM configuration 1 until receiving a configuration activation command activating the LTM configuration 1 (e.g., the event 330). [0072] The events 308 (optional) and 310 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM preparation procedure 390. The events 316, 318, 320, 322 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM configuration delivery procedure 394.
  • the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message
  • the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the CU 172 transmits a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to UE Context Modification Required message.
  • the second CU-to-DU message is a DE RRC Message Transfer message.
  • the second CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message
  • the DU 174 transmits a second DU-to-CU message (e.g., UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU 172 in response to the second CU-to-DU message.
  • a second DU-to-CU message e.g., UE Context Modification Response message
  • the CU 172 includes a reference LTM CU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container.
  • the CU 172 generates the LTM CU configuration 1 (i.e., non-reference LTM CU configuration) as a delta configuration to augment the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 generates some or all of the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as delta configuration(s) to augment the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container, includes the reference LTM CU configuration and does not include a non-reference LTM CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and/or the reference LTM DU configuration in an additional container (e.g., reference LTM configuration) and includes the additional container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • an additional container e.g., reference LTM configuration
  • the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving CU configuration, and the rest of the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the rest of the serving CU configuration. In yet other implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as the serving LTM CU configuration.
  • the CU assigns an ID for the LTM DU Configuration 1
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, a first LTM ID (referred to herein after as ID 1) for identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1.
  • ID 1 a first LTM ID
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first container or element 1.
  • the CU 172 assigns the ID 1.
  • the CU 172 receives the ID 1 from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message, as described below.
  • the CU 172 assigns or generates the ID 1
  • the CU 172 transmits the ID 1 to the DU 174
  • the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 in the first CU-to-DU message, includes the ID 1 and indicates that the ID 1 is associated with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 after receiving the first DU-to-CU message, transmits 312 a third CU-to-DU message including the ID 1 to the DU 174 instead of including the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 in the third CU-to-DU message, includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and the ID 1. The CU 172 further indicates the association between the ID 1 and LTM DU configuration 1. Thus, the DU 174 directly associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 includes the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 (i.e., the first LTM ID), and indicates the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1. Thus, in some such implementations, the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1 based on the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 and the association between the cell ID 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 in the third CU-to- DU message, includes the LTM DU configuration 1, the cell ID 1, and the ID 1, and indicates the association between the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, and the cell ID 1.
  • the DU 174 transmits 314 a third DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 in response to the third CU-to-DU message.
  • the third CU-to- DU message and third DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message.
  • the events 312 (optional) and 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM ID assignment procedure 392.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1, the cell ID 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration 1 in the second CU-to-DU message, as described above.
  • the CU 172 can omit the third CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container or element 1.
  • the DU 174 does not include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container and/or element 1.
  • the DU 174 assigns the ID 1 identifying the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message as described above.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container, or element 1.
  • the CU 172 does not include an ID identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element 1.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 and outside the first container.
  • the CU 172 generates a third container (e.g., a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the third container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container.
  • the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 generates a fourth container (e.g., a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the fourth container in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
  • the CU 172 includes the fourth container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 retrieves the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 from the fourth container and includes the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 as described above.
  • the plurality of configuration parameters includes a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)).
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters.
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes a MeasConfig IE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331) or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConfig IE.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
  • the LTM CU configuration 1 includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
  • the DU 174 includes a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the random access configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration, as described below. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the random access configuration, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the random access configuration.
  • the DU 174 includes random access configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the reference LTM DU configuration regardless of whether the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized or not.
  • the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration parameters, as described below.
  • the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the first indication, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in accordance with or in response to the first indication. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the first indication, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in accordance with the random access configuration in the event 332, in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the first indication, as described below.
  • the DU 174 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • a reconfiguration with sync configuration e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE
  • the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 as described below, in response to or in accordance with the reconfiguration with sync configuration.
  • the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332.
  • the DU 174 includes a cell ID (i.e., cell ID 1) of cell 1 (i.e., the first cell) in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the cell ID 1 is a PCI.
  • the cell ID 1 is a CGI.
  • the cell ID 1 included in the LTM DU configuration 1 is a PCI, while the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message is a CGI.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 or the first cell (e.g., the cell index 1 is not a cell ID).
  • the cell index takes fewer bits than the cell ID.
  • the CU 172 sets the cell index 1 to a value and includes the cell index 1 in the first CU-to-DU message of the event 308.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare additional cell(s) (i.e., cell(s) 2, ..., N) of the base station 104 for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the base station 104 can use the additional cell(s) to communicate with the UE 102.
  • the additional cell(s) include the cell 124C and/or cell(s) other than the cells 124A, 124B, and 124C. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicate that signal strength and/or quality of a particular cell of the additional cell(s) is above a respective predetermined threshold and/or is better than the cell 124A, the CU 172 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cells are different from the first predetermined threshold.
  • the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cell(s) are the same as the first predetermined threshold.
  • the respective predetermined thresholds for the additional cells are the same or different.
  • the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measurement report is received from the UE 102 or not.
  • the CU 172 determines to prepare the additional cell(s)
  • the CU 172 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure with the DU 174 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
  • the DU 174 determines to prepare the additional cell(s)
  • the DU 174 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure with the CU 172 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
  • the CU 172 and DU 174 perform LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N to prepare the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, similar to the procedure 390.
  • the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N in CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, similar to the first CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 In the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, the DU 174 generates LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N configuring the cell(s) 2, ..., N and includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in DU-to-CU message(s) 2, .., N, respectively, as described for the LTM DU configuration 1. In cases where the DU 174 receives the CU-to- DU message(s) 2, ..., N, the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N responds to the CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. “N” is an integer and larger than one.
  • N is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 14, 15, 16, etc.
  • the maximum number of “N” is 4, 8, 16, 32, etc. Examples and implementations of the LTM DU configuration 1 can apply to the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the CU 172 and DU 174 performs a single LTM preparation procedure (i.e., the LTM preparation procedure 390) to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N for the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively in the first DU-to-CU message.
  • the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message, includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N respectively 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N are configured for the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 determines to perform the LTM preparation procedure 390, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively, for LTM.
  • the CU 172 after receiving the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in element(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, and includes the element(s) 2, ..., N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, LTM ID(s) (i.e., ID(s) 2, ..., N) for identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • LTM ID(s) i.e., ID(s) 2, ..., N
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first container.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N and LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the element(s) 2, ..., N in the first addition or modification list.
  • the CU 172 assigns the ID(s) 2, ..., N for the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives the ID(s) 2, ..., N from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 receives, from the DU 174, the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the DU- to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 performs an LTM ID assignment procedure with the DU 174 for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, similar to the procedure 392.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicates the association between the ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the DU 174 associates the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N with the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicates the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the DU 174 associates the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N with the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, based on the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N, and the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, .. N, the cell ID(s) 2, .. N and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, .. N in the second CU-to-DU message as described above. Thus, the CU 172 can omit the third CU-to- DU message.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first CU-to-DU message and indicates that the ID(s) 2, ..., N are respectively associated with the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N. Thus, the CU 172 does not include the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container, and/or element(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 assigns the ID(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .. ,,N.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the CU 172 does not include an ID (e.g., LTM ID) identifying each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container, and/or element 1.
  • the CU 172 generates a second container including the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N or element(s) 2, ..., N instead of using the first container.
  • the CU 172 then transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration message, including the second container, to the UE 102 via the DU 174, similar to the events 316 and 318.
  • the UE 102 transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the events 320 and 322.
  • the second container is a second addition or modification list (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddModList IE), and each of the element(s) 2, ..., N is an addition or modification IE (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM-ConfigToAddMod l , Itm- CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE).
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 receives the second addition or modification list, the UE 102 stores the second addition or modification list together with the first addition or modification list (e.g., in a variable in the random access memory (RAM)).
  • RAM random access memory
  • the DU 174 includes cell ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N to identify the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • each of the cell ID(s) 2, .. N is a PCI.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N includes cell index(es) 2 , ..., N indexing the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N or the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 In some cases where the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, ..., N for LTM in the procedure 390, the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 2, ..., N to different value(s) and includes the cell index(es) 2, ..., N in the first CU-to CU-to-DU message of the event 308. In some cases where the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, ..., N in the additional LTM preparation procedure(s), the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 2, ..., N to different values and includes the cell index(es) 2, ..., N in CU-to-DU message(s) of the additional LTM preparation procedure(s).
  • the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ..., N to different values.
  • the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are different from the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message(s) described above.
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes physical configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, RLC configuration parameters, and/or LI measurement configuration(s).
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters included in a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • the plurality of configuration parameters in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) include a particular special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)).
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are CellGroupConfig IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
  • the CU 172 includes one or more additional LTM CU configurations in at least one of the element(s) 2, ..., N, the first container, or the second container.
  • Each of the additional LTM CU configurations are associated with a particular LTM DU configuration of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N. Examples and implementations of the additional LTM CU configurations are similar to the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 determines to release the LTM DU configuration M of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N (or the element M of the element(s) 1, .. M), where 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N.
  • the CU 172 transmits an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the DU 174 to indicate to the UE 102 to release the LTM DU configuration M or element M.
  • the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M for releasing the LTM DU configuration M or element M and includes the release list in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration M or element M and transmits an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to- DU message to the DU 174 to indicate to the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M.
  • the CU 172 includes the cell ID M or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 releases the LTM DU configuration M and transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172.
  • the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the DU 174 determines to release the LTM DU configuration K. In response to the determination, the DU 174 transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 to release the LTM DU configuration K. In some implementations, to indicate that the LTM DU configuration K is released, the DU 174 includes the cell ID K or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the DU-to-CU message. Eurther, 1 ⁇ K ⁇ N.
  • a release indication e.g., a field or IE
  • the CU 172 After (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K to release the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits an RRC reconfiguration message including the release list to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In response, the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 in response to the DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message and CU-to-DU message are a UE Context Modification Required message and a UE Context Modification Confirm message, respectively.
  • the UE 102 After receiving the RRC reconfiguration in the event 318 or transmitting the RRC reconfiguration complete message in the event 320, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304.
  • the DU 174 transmits 326 a DU-to-CU message, including the at least one measurement report, to the CU 172, similar to the event 306.
  • the DU 174 does not transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the at least one measurement report of the event 324 includes LI measurement report(s) or L3 measurement repot(s), as described for the event 304.
  • the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report on PUCCH(s) and/or PUSCH(s) to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In other implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one MAC CE including the at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174 in accordance with at least one measurement configuration.
  • the at least one measurement configuration configures the UE 102 to perform measurements and report measurement results.
  • the CU 172 transmits the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174.
  • the CU 172 transmits one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)), including the at least one measurement configuration, to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the event 302 and/or 316 and/or after the event 306 or 316.
  • the one or more RRC messages do or do not include the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
  • the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals.
  • the one or more reference signals include one or more SSBs and/or one or more CSLRSs.
  • the UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements and includes the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result in the at least measurement report of the event 324.
  • the DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A, the cell 1, and/or the cell(s) 2, ..., N.
  • the one or more reference signals are CSLRS(s) or SSB(s).
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)), as described for the event 304.
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes LI measurement configuration(s), as described for the event 304.
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) are CSI-MeasConfig IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions).
  • the LI measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s). The UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s).
  • the at least one measurement configuration includes new-type measurement configuration(s) (e.g., LTM measurement configuration(s)).
  • the new-type measurement configuration(s) are newly defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS v 18.0.0 and/or later versions).
  • the new-type measurement configuration(s) include reference signal resource configuration(s) configuring resources where the DU 174 transmits reference signal(s).
  • the reference signal resource configuration(s) include CSI-RS(s) and/or SSB(s).
  • the reference signal resource configuration(s) are CSl-ResourceConfig IE(s).
  • the new-type measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s), as described above.
  • the UE 102 transmits the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s).
  • the DU 174 receives the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s).
  • the measurement report(s) are LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s) (e.g., LTM measurement report(s)).
  • the new-type measurement configuration includes configuration parameters newly defined (e.g., in a 3GPP TS v 18.0.0 and/or later versions).
  • the DU 174 After (e.g., in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report in the event 324, the DU 174 generates a first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 (i.e., the first LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 or to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1). The DU 174 then transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124A to the UE 102. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124D to the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate the LTM DU configuration 1, and the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the ID 1.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 in the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 based on the cell index 1.
  • the UE 102 then applies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM CU configuration 1 in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 includes a bit map in the first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1, instead of the ID 1 or cell index 1.
  • the number of bits in the bit map is larger than or equal to “N”.
  • bit 1, ..., N corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, the ID(s) 1, ..., N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, or the element(s) 1, ..., N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 1) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1, or the element 1.
  • the UE 102 determines the cell index 1, ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit 1 set to the first value in the bit map.
  • bit 0, ..., N-l corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, the ID(s) 1, ..., N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, or the element (s) 1, ..., N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 0) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1, or the element 1.
  • the UE 102 determines the cell index 1, ID 1, LTM configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit 0 set to the first value in the bit map.
  • the DU 174 sets the remaining bits in the bit map to a second value to indicate that the rest of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are not activated.
  • the first value is one and the second value is zero. In other implementations, the first value is zero and the second value is one.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration L or change a serving cell to the cell L, the DU 174 sets the corresponding bit (e.g., bit L or bit L-7) in the bit map to the first value and sets the remaining bits to the second value, where 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N. In some implementations, the DU 174 sets at most one bit in the bit map to the first value.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s)) of the event 324 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell, TRP(s) of the first cell or reference signal(s) transmitted on the first cell.
  • the reference signal(s) are CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s).
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, based on the at least one measurement result. In some implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 because, when, or if the at least one measurement result is above a second predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement result includes Ll-RSRP value(s), Ll-RSRQ value(s) and/or Ll-SINR value(s). In other implementations, the at least one measurement result includes RSRP value(s), RSRQ value(s), and/or SINR value(s) for the new-type measurement report(s).
  • the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In this case, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) of the events 324 and 326 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, because the at least one measurement result indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above a second predetermined threshold.
  • the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold.
  • the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102.
  • the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold.
  • the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold, further indicating that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to the signal strength or quality of the first cell being above the second predetermined threshold.
  • the CU 172 transmits 328 a fourth CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a serving cell change to the cell 1 for the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell ID 1.
  • the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1.
  • the fourth CU-to-DU message and fourth DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the DU 174 when or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit 330 the first LTM command, transmits 329 to the CU 172 a DU-to-CU message indicating that LTM is (being) executed.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 or the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to- CU message 329 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a fast serving cell change.
  • the DU transmits the DU-to-CU message 329 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 330.
  • the first LTM command is a MAC CE included in a MAC PDU that the UE 102 receives from the DU 174 in the event 330.
  • the MAC CE is a new MAC CE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions).
  • the DU 174 includes a subheader identifying the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU, and the UE 102 identifies the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU in accordance with the subheader.
  • the subheader includes a logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS) to identify the new MAC CE.
  • the logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID are newly defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions).
  • the first LTM command is a DO that the UE 102 receives on a PDCCH from the DU 174 in the event 330.
  • the DU 174 generates a CRC for the DO, scrambles the CRC with a first C-RNTI of the UE 102, and transmits the DCI and scrambled CRC on the PDCCH in the event 330.
  • a format of the DCI is an existing DCI format (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS (e.g., 38.212)).
  • the format of the DCI is a new DCI format (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS (e.g., 38.212 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions)).
  • the DU 174 does not perform security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the first LTM command. This speeds up processing the first LTM command in the UE 102 because the UE 102 does not perform a security check (e.g., decryption and/or integrity check) on the first LTM command.
  • security protection e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption
  • the CU 172 transmits 316 the RRC reconfiguration message in response to the L3 measurement report 306 for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 transmits a first RRC reconfiguration message, including the L3 measurement configuration (e.g., a MeasConfig IE), to the UE 102 before the event 306.
  • the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command in response to the LI measurement report(s) 324 for the first cell.
  • the CU 172 transmits a second RRC reconfiguration message including the LI or new-type measurement configuration(s) to the UE 102.
  • the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are the same message (i.e., the same instance). In other implementations, the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are different messages.
  • the second RRC reconfiguration message is the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316. In other implementations, the second RRC reconfiguration message is different from the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
  • the UE 102 After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1 and applies the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs 332 a random access procedure on the first cell with the DU 174 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, the UE 102 disconnects from the cell 124A after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or after transmitting the acknowledgement. In other words, the UE 102 stops communicating on the cell 124A after (e.g., in response to) receiving 330 the first LTM command or transmitting 331 the acknowledgement.
  • the UE 102 performs 332 the random access procedure after disconnecting from the cell 124A.
  • the UE 102 determines whether to perform the random access procedure in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure
  • the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 refrains from performing a random access procedure with the DU 174 upon receiving the first LTM command. In such cases, the UE 102 skips the event 316.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 excludes a reconfiguration with sync configuration
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 not to perform a random access procedure.
  • the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure. In some implementations, the random access procedure is a contention-free random access procedure.
  • the random access procedure is a contention-based random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and reference LTM DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174, after successfully completing the random access procedure.
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 in the event 332 and/or event 336.
  • the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs, DL PDUs, and/or physical layer signals (e.g., PUCCH transmissions and PDCCH transmissions) with the base station 104 in the event 336.
  • the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure when the UE 102 receives a contention resolution from the DU 174.
  • the UE 102 transmits a Message 3 including a UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 transmits a Message A including the UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure.
  • the UE identity is the second C-RNTI of the UE 102.
  • the UE identity is the first C-RNTI.
  • the UE 102 transmits the dedicated random access preamble to the DU 174 via the first cell. In such cases, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the dedicated random access preamble.
  • the DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the UE identity or the dedicated preamble from the UE 102 in the random access procedure 332.
  • the UE 102 directly communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 directly communicates UL PDUs, DL PDUs, and/or physical layer signals (e.g., PUCCH transmissions and PDCCH transmissions) with the base station 104 in the event 336.
  • the DU 174 includes, in the LTM DU configuration 1, configuration parameters configuring resources for the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, and the UE 102 transmits the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources, using the configuration parameters, to indicate that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the DU 174 transmits, to the UE 102, at least one DCI on a PDCCH on the first cell to command the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, after transmitting the first LTM command.
  • the at least one DCI configures resources for the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, and the UE 102 transmits the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources.
  • the DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the PUCCH or PUSCH transmission.
  • the DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources configured in the LTM DU configuration 1 or the at least one DCI.
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the UE 102 In cases where the UE 102 receives neither the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a reference LTM CU configuration, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 neither transmits the LTM CU configuration 1 nor the reference CU configuration to the UE 102, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1.
  • the UE 102 In cases where the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and does not receive the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 instead of the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration.
  • the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a full configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration.
  • the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration by excluding the first indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration by excluding the second indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the UE 102 In cases where the UE 102 receives the reference LTM CU configuration and does not receive the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration instead of the serving CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 and CU 172 determine that the reference LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331).
  • the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the reference LTM CU configuration.
  • a first indication e.g., a field or IE
  • the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration by excluding the first indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration.
  • the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration by excluding the second indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
  • the UE 102 In cases where the UE 102 neither receives the reference LTM CU configuration nor the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration.
  • the UE 102 transmits an RRC message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell to indicate that the UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • RRC message e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message
  • the UE 102 includes the RRC message in the Message 3 or Message A.
  • the UE 102 transmits the RRC message after completing the random access procedure.
  • the UE 102 includes the RRC message in a PUSCH transmission of the at least one PUSCH transmission.
  • the UE 102 if the UE 102 maintains communication on the cell 124A with the base station 104 (i.e., the UE 102 does not disconnect from the cell 124A), the UE 102 transmits the RRC message to the base station 104 via the cell 124A.
  • the DU 174 receives the RRC message, the DU 174 transmits the RRC message to the CU 172.
  • the UE 102 refrains from transmitting the RRC message to the base station 104 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 includes or transmits data in the Message 3, Message A or PUSCH transmission as described above.
  • the UE 102 generates a MAC PDU and/or an RLC PDU, including the data, and transmits or includes the MAC PDU and/or RLC PDU in the PUSCH transmission.
  • the data is a PDCP PDU, an SDAP PDU, an LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) PDU, an RRC PDU, and/or a NAS PDU.
  • LPP LTE Positioning Protocol
  • the RRC PDU includes a UL-DCCH-Message excluding an RRC reconfiguration complete message.
  • the NAS PDU includes a Mobility Management (MM) message or a Session Management (SM) message.
  • MM Mobility Management
  • SM Session Management
  • the MM message is a 5G MM message or a 6G MM message
  • the SM message is a 5G SM message or a 6G SM message.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connects to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 transmits 334 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., Access Success message) to the CU 172 (e.g., a CP of the CU 172).
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 of the first cell in the DU-to-CU message of the event 334.
  • the cell ID is a PCI or a CGI.
  • the CU 172 determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the DU-to-CU message of the event 334.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connect to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 transmits a DL Data Delivery Status message or frame to the CU 172 (e.g., a UP of the CU 172).
  • the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174 until receiving the DU-to-CU message 334.
  • the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission because the DU 174 does not buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332.
  • the CU 172 After receiving the DU-to-CU message 334, the CU 172 continues or resumes transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. In other implementations, when the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 329, the CU 172 continues transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. In some such implementations, the CU 172 continues transmission because the DU 174 buffers DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332. When or after the DU 174 detects that the UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the DU 174 transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
  • the DU 174 stops communicating with the UE 102 on the cell 124A and/or releases resources of the cell 124 A configured for the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 generates some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s) to replace the serving DU configuration. If the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 instead of the serving DU configuration.
  • the DU 174 includes an indication that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the DU 174 includes an indication to indicate that the corresponding DU configuration is a full configuration.
  • each of the indication(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N is a field or IE (i.e., the same field or IE).
  • the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 includes, in the additional RRC reconfiguration message, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s).
  • the CU 172 includes, in the first container, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the CU 172 includes, in the first container, a particular indication that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In some cases, for the second container, the CU 172 includes, in the second container, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the element 1, an indication that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration.
  • the CU 172 in each of the element(s) 2, ..., N, includes an indication that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N are full configuration(s) based on the indication(s) above. In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is different from fullConfig field (e.g., as defined in the current 3GPP TS). In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is fullConfig field (e.g., as defined in the current 3GPP TS).
  • the UE 102 in the event 336 does not apply the reference LTM DU configuration if received from the base station 104 (e.g., in the RRC reconfiguration message 318).
  • the DU 174 does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2..., N, first container, second container, or element(s) 1, ..., N exclude indication(s) indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2..., N are full configuration(s) to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N are delta configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 determines that each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is a delta configuration based on the indication being excluded in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N, first container, second container, or element(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N.
  • the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s).
  • the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N are delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving DU configuration not augmented by LTM DU configuration 1.
  • the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and the at least a portion of the serving DU configuration.
  • the UE 102 uses a UE MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) to communicate with a DU MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330, and/or 331).
  • the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the UE MAC entity (i.e., UE MAC reset or full UE MAC reset): (i) initialize Bj for configured logical channel(s) to zero; (ii) stop one or more timers; (iii) consider timeAlignmentTimeris) as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (iv) set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (v) set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1; (vi) flush Msg3 buffer; (vii) flush MSGA buffer; (viii) cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the DU MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset or full DU MAC reset): (i) stop one or more timers; (ii) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (iii) set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iv) flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); (v) for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission; and/or (vi) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs
  • the UE 102 determines to partially or fully reset the UE MAC entity.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 fully resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a full UE MAC reset). In the full UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs some or all of the actions described above.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 partially resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a partial UE MAC reset).
  • the UE 102 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full UE MAC reset.
  • the partial UE MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions: (i) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) of the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (ii) flush Msg3 buffer; (iii) flush MSGA buffer; (iv) release, if any, Temporary C-RNTI; and/or (v) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
  • the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions: (i) cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure; (ii) cancel, if any, triggered Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (iii) cancel, if any, triggered Power Headroom Reporting procedure; (iv) cancel, if any, triggered consistent LBT failure; (v) cancel, if any, triggered BFR; (vi) cancel, if any, triggered Sidelink Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (vii) cancel, if any, triggered Pre-emptive Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (viii) cancel, if any, triggered Timing Advance Reporting procedure; (ix) cancel, if any, triggered Recommended bit rate query procedure; (x) cancel, if any, triggered configured uplink grant confirmation; (xi) cancel, if any, triggered configured sidelink grant confirmation; (xii) cancel, if any, triggered Desired Guard Symbol query; and/or (xiii)
  • the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions: (i) stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers; (ii) set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iii) set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1; (iv) flush soft buffers for DL HARQ process(es); and/or (v) for each of the DL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
  • the DU 174 determines to partially or fully reset the DU MAC entity.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 fully resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a full DU MAC reset). In the full DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs some or all of the actions described above.
  • the DU 174 when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 partially resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a partial DU MAC reset).
  • the DU 174 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full DU MAC reset.
  • the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions in the partial MAC reset: (i) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1) and/or (ii) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
  • the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions for the MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset): (i) stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers; (ii) set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iii) flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); (iv) for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission; and/or (v) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
  • the MAC entity i.e., DU MAC reset
  • the UE 102 refrains from resetting the UE MAC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 refrains from resetting the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the UE MAC entity (not reset).
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the DU MAC entity (not reset) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 uses at least one UE RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) to communicate RLC PDUs with at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331).
  • the UE 102 reestablishes some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 does or does not include one or more RLC reestablishment indications (e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)) configuring the UE 102 to reestablish some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity.
  • RLC reestablishment indications e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)
  • the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the an RLC reestablishment indication configuring the UE 102 to reestablish a first UE RLC entity of the at least one UE RLC entity that the UE 102 uses to communicate RLC PDU(s) with the DU 174
  • the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity in response to the RLC reestablishment indication and the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell.
  • the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity while or after performing 332 the random access procedure. Otherwise if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity in response to the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 when the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the first UE RLC entity: (i) discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any; (ii) stop and reset timer(s), if running; and/or (iii) reset state variables to initial values.
  • the state variables and timer(s) are pre-defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.322).
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In other words, the UE 102 refrains from preforming the actions for reestablishing the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and includes an indication that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., NR RLC 206B) that the DU 174 uses to communicate with the at least one UE RLC entity of the UE 102 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330, and/or 331) in response to the RLC reestablishment indication.
  • at least one DU RLC entity e.g., NR RLC 206B
  • the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., NR RLC 206B) that the DU 174 uses to communicate with the at least one UE RLC entity of the UE 102 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330, and/or 331) in response to the RLC reestablishment indication.
  • the DU 174 reestablishes a first DU RLC entity of the at least one DU RLC entity after transmitting the first LTM command, receiving an acknowledgement for the first LTM command from the UE 102, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK.
  • the acknowledgement is a MAC CE.
  • the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission.
  • the DU 174 when the base station 104 reestablishes the first DU RLC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the first DU RLC entity: (i) discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any; (ii) stop and reset timer(s), if running; and/or (iii) reset state variables to initial values.
  • the state variables and timer(s) are pre-defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.322).
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the DU 174 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity (not reestablished).
  • the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity includes the first UE RLC entity and/or a second UE RLC entity.
  • the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity (not reestablished) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
  • the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity includes the first DU RLC entity and/or a second DU RLC entity.
  • the UE 102 uses at least one UE PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) to communicate UL PDCP PDUs and/or DL PDCP PDUs with at least one CU PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) of the CU 172 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for a first UE PDCP entity of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the UE 102 in the PDCP recovery procedure, does or does not reestablish the first UE PDCP entity.
  • the UE 102 after or in response to performing the PDCP recovery procedure, the UE 102 retransmits at least a portion of the UL PDCP PDUs to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336.
  • the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command.
  • the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for a first CU PDCP entity of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command.
  • the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 334.
  • the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message.
  • the CU 172 does or does not reestablish the first CU PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 after or in response to performing the PDCP recovery procedure, the CU 172 retransmits at least a portion of the DL PDCP PDUs to the UE 102 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336.
  • the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity in response to receiving the first LTM command.
  • the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 340 or after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity (not reestablished).
  • the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity (not reestablished) via the DU 174 and the first cell.
  • the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity includes the first CU PDCP entity and/or a second CU PDCP entity.
  • the CU 172 transmits 338 a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Request message) to the DU 174 to indicate to the DU 174 to stop communicating with the UE 102 and/or to release or suspend resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102.
  • a CU-to-DU message e.g., a UE Context Modification Request message
  • the DU 174 stops communicating on the cell 124A with the UE 102 and/or releases or suspends resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102, and transmits 340 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU-172.
  • a DU-to-CU message e.g., a UE Context Modification Response message
  • the events 338 (optional) and 340 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a resource release procedure 396.
  • events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354, and/or 356 occur, similar to the events 324, 326, 328, 330, 331, 332, 334, and/or 336, respectively.
  • the UE 102 transmits 344 at least one measurement report to the DU 174.
  • the at least one measurement report includes at least one measurement result for a second cell (i.e., the cell 2).
  • the at least one measurement result indicates that the second cell is suitable for communication with UE 102 and/or the first cell is not suitable for communication with the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 and generates a second LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 (i.e., the second LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 2).
  • the DU 174 then transmits 350 the second LTM command to the UE on the first cell to the UE 102.
  • the DU 174 when or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 or transmit the second LTM command, transmits 349 to the CU 172 a DU-to-CU message indicating LTM (being) executed.
  • the DU 174 includes the cell ID 2 or the ID 2 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 349 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 2.
  • the DU transmits the DU-to-CU message 349 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 350.
  • the events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354 are collectively referred to in Eig. 3 as an LTM execution procedure 398.
  • the events 304, 306, 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336, 396, 398, 356 are collectively referred to in Eig. 3 as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 380.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a source DU (S-DU) 174A, and a target DU (T-DU) 174B.
  • the S-DU 174A operates the cell 124A and optionally additional cell(s), while the T-DU 174B operates a first cell (e.g., cell 124C).
  • the scenario 400 is similar to the scenario 300. Thus, the descriptions for the scenario 300 can generally apply to the scenario 400. The differences between the scenarios 300 and 400 are described below.
  • the UE 102 communicates 402 with the S-DU 174A on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A.
  • the UE 102 transmits 404, 406 at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) to the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 determines to prepare cell(s) 1, ..., N (operated by the T-DU 174B) for LTM for the UE 102, where N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1.
  • the cell(s) 1, ..., N are identified by cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 performs 490 an LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B to prepare and/or request the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM for the UE 102.
  • N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message, including the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, to the T- DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM for the UE 102, similar to the event 308.
  • the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the CU 172, similar to the event 310.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure the cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM, respectively.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) 1, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490 are a UE Context Setup Request message and UE Context Setup Response message, respectively.
  • the CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in an RRC reconfiguration message in an LTM configuration delivery procedure 494, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394.
  • the T-DU 174B includes cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ..., N to different values and includes the cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the CU- to-DU message of the procedure 490.
  • the CU 172 after performing the LTM preparation procedure 490, performs additional LTM preparation procedure(s) with the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM for the UE 102, where M is a positive integer larger than zero. In further implementations, the CU 172 determines to do so based on one or more measurement reports received from the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the events 404, 406.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the T-DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identify the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively.
  • the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the CU 172.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M configure the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM, respectively.
  • the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively.
  • the CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M in an RRC reconfiguration message in an additional LTM configuration delivery procedure, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394 or 494.
  • the LTM preparation procedure 490 is a UE Context Setup procedure
  • the additional LTM preparation procedure is a UE Context Modification procedure.
  • the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the procedure 380 the CU 172 and S-DU 174A performs the procedure(s) 390 and/or 392 to prepare cell(s) of the S-DU 174A for LTM for the UE 102.
  • the value N in the procedure 380 or described for Fig. 3 is same as or different from the value N described for Fig. 4.
  • the CU 172 receives the first DU-to-CU message including the reference LTM DU configuration from the S-DU 174A in the event 310.
  • the CU 172 and S-DU 174A do not perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102.
  • the CU 172 performs a reference LTM DU configuration query procedure with the S-DU 174A to obtain a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 transmits 460 a CU-to-DU message to the S-DU 174A to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the CU 172 includes an indication in the CU-to-DU message to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the S-DU 174A transmits 462 a DU-to-CU message, including a reference LTM DU configuration, to the CU 172.
  • the indication is a reference LTM DU configuration query indication.
  • the indication is an LTM indication
  • the CU 172 includes a query indication (e.g., GNB-DU Configuration Query IE) in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 After receiving the reference LTM DU configuration (i.e., either in the procedure 390 or in the procedure 488), the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., received from the S-DU 174A) in the CU-to-DU message in the LTM preparation procedure 490.
  • the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. N based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172. In such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490.
  • the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure.
  • the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in a CU-to-DU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B.
  • the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172.
  • the CU 172 does not provide a reference LTM DU configuration to the T-DU 174B in the LTM preparation procedure 490.
  • the T- DU 174B generates a reference LTM DU configuration and generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N based on the reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the T-DU 174B includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490.
  • the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 490.
  • the T-DU 174B In cases regarding the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration. In some such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration that the T-DU 174B generates is different from the reference LTM DU configuration that the S-DU 174A generates. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration that the T-DU 174B generates is the same as the reference LTM DU configuration that the S-DU 174A generates.
  • the CU 172 assigns ID(s) 1, ..., N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N (e.g., received from the T-DU 174B), respectively, and performs the procedure 492 with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ..., N to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392.
  • the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) 1, ..., N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively.
  • the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) 1, ..., N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N (e.g., generated by the T-DU 174B), respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, .. N in the DU-to-CU message of the procedure 490, similar to the event 310.
  • the CU 172 assigns ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively, and performs a procedure (similar to the procedure 492) with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392.
  • the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively.
  • the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ..., N in the DU-to-CU message of the additional LTM preparation procedure, similar to the event 310.
  • the CU 172 transmits 412 a CU-to-DU message, including the ID(s) 1, ..., N, to the S-DU 174A and receives 414 a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response.
  • the CU-to-DU message 412 and DU-to-CU message 414 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as an LTM ID transfer procedure or an LTM cell index transfer procedure 493.
  • the message 412 and message 414 are a UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In further implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 performs multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU- to-DU message similar to the message 412.
  • the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) 1, ..., N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 performs multiple LTM cell index transfer procedures to transmit the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 includes particular portion of the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU-to-DU message, similar to the message 412.
  • the S- DU 174A associates the cell index(es) 1, N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, .. N, respectively.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message, including the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, to the S-DU 174A and receives a DU-to-CU message from the S- DU 174A in response, similar to the CU-to-DU message 412 and the DU-to-CU message 414, respectively.
  • the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M in the CU-to-DU message.
  • the CU 172 performs multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the S-DU 174A.
  • the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU-to-DU message similar to the message 412.
  • the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively.
  • value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ...., N and the ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400.
  • value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1, ...., N and the cell ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400.
  • value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ...., N and the cell index(es) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400.
  • the UE 102 transmits 424 at least one measurement report to the S-DU 174A, similar to the event 324.
  • the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)) includes an event ID, first measurement result(s) for the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, and/or second measurement result(s) for the cell 124A.
  • the first measurement result(s) are or include RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 1.
  • the second measurement result(s) are or include RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 124A.
  • the event ID, RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR are Ll-event ID, Ll-RSRP, Ll-RSRQ, and/or Ll-SINR, respectively.
  • the S-DU 174A transmits 430 a first LTM command (i.e., LTM command 1), including the ID 1, to the UE 102 to order the UE 102 to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B.
  • the first LTM command includes the ID 1.
  • the first LTM command includes the cell index 1.
  • the UE 102 after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 does or does not perform 432 a random access procedure with the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 332.
  • the UE 102 after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or completing the random access procedure 432, the UE 102 communicates 436 with the T-DU 174B on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 336.
  • the serving cell if a serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380, the serving cell is the cell 1 or cell 2 of the S-DU 174A.
  • the serving cell is the cell 124A. If the first LTM command includes the ID 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1) based on the ID 1, as described with regard to Eig. 3. If the first LTM command includes the cell index 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1, cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1), and/or LTM ID 1 based on the cell index 1, as described with regard to Eig. 3. The UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the T-DU 174B after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or successfully accessing the cell 1.
  • the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the S-DU 174A until receiving the DU-to-CU message 434.
  • the CU 172 starts, continues, or resumes transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the T-DU 174B.
  • the T-DU 174B detects that the UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the T-DU 174B transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
  • the resource release procedure 496 can be similar to the procedure 396.
  • the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Command message) to the S-DU 174A to release a UE context of the UE 102.
  • the S-DU 174A releases a UE context of the UE 102 and transmits 440 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Complete message) to the CU-172.
  • a CU-to-DU message e.g., a UE Context Release Command message
  • a scenario 500A the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN.
  • the SN 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174.
  • the scenario 500A is similar to the scenario 300, except that the scenario 500A is a DC scenario and the scenario 300 is a single connectivity (SC) scenario.
  • the MN 106 can include a CU and a DU similar to the base station 104 of Fig. 3.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates with the MN 106 and with the SN 104.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302.
  • the UE 102 does not communicate with the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 and/or SN 104 via radio bearers which, depending on the implementation, include SRBs and/or DRB(s).
  • the MN 106 and/or the SN 104 configure the radio bearers to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the SN 104 on an SCG (i.e., SCG radio resources) that the SN 104 configures for communication with the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 in DC communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 on an MCG (i.e., MCG radio resources) in accordance with an MN configuration (i.e., MCG configuration).
  • the serving DU configuration is an SN configuration (i.e., SCG configuration).
  • the MN 106 configures the MCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 126 and/or other cell(s)) operated by the MN 106.
  • the SN 106A configures the SCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 124A and/or other cell(s)) operated by the SN 104.
  • the MN configuration includes multiple configuration parameters, and the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the MN 106.
  • the serving DU configuration includes multiple configuration parameters.
  • the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the SN 104 (e.g., via the MN 106 and/or on an SRB (e.g., SRB3) that the MN 106 or SN 104 configures to exchange RRC messages between the UE 102 and the SN 104).
  • SRB e.g., SRB3
  • the MN 106 while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the MN 106 performs 580 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480. In some implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 transmits the at least one measurement report to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and cell 124A in the events 504 and 506, similar to the events 304 and 306, respectively. In other implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 transmits 505 at least one measurement report to the MN 106 via the cell 126.
  • the MN 106 in turn transmits 507 the at least one measurement report to the CU 172.
  • the MN 106 generates at least one SN message, including the at least one measurement report, and transmits the at least one SN message to the CU 172 in the event 507.
  • the at least one SN message include RRC Transfer message(s) and/or SN Modification Request message(s).
  • the SN 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3.
  • the events 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, and 556 are similar to the events 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336, 396, 398, and 356, respectively.
  • the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 536 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates 536 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 336.
  • the DU 174 and/or CU 172 performs the LTM execution procedure 598 with the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a cell change from the first cell to the second cell, similar to the procedure 398 or 498.
  • the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 556 with the DU 174 on the second cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 2 and communicates 556 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 356.
  • the events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5A as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 581.
  • a scenario 500B is generally similar to the scenario 500A, except that the SN 104 transmits 517, 519 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 521, 523 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
  • the RRC reconfiguration message 517, 519 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318.
  • the RRC reconfiguration complete message 521, 523 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 320, 322.
  • the SN 104 generates a first SN message (e.g., SN Modification Required message, SN Modification Required message, or RRC Transfer message), including the RRC reconfiguration message, and transmits the first SN message to the MN 106 in the event 517.
  • the MN 106 generates an MN RRC message including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits 519 the MN RRC message to the UE 102.
  • the UE 102 generates an MN RRC response message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits 521 the MN RRC response message to the MN 106.
  • the MN 106 generates a second SN message (e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits the second SN message to the SN 104 in the event 523.
  • a second SN message e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message
  • the MN RRC message and MN RRC response message are an RRC reconfiguration message and an RRC reconfiguration complete message, respectively.
  • Fig. 5B The events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 517, 519, 521, 523, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5B as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 582.
  • Fig. 6A Referring next to Fig. 6A, in a scenario 600A, the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-500B.
  • the SN 104 includes a CU 172, an S-DU 174A and a T-DU 174B, similar to the base station 104 in the scenario 400.
  • the MN 106 performs 680 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480.
  • the CU 172 while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 681 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A or S-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
  • a scenario 600B is similar to the scenarios 300-500B and 600A, except that that the SN 104 transmits 617, 619 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 621, 623 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
  • the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-600B.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A and a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B.
  • the CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as an MN, similar to the base station 104 in the Fig. 3 or the MN 106 in Figs. 5A-6B, and the CU 172 operates with the S-DU 174B as an SN, similar to the SN 104 in Figs. 5A-6B.
  • the UE 102 initially communicates 702 in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B and communicates 702 with the CU 172 via the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B.
  • the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174B using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302.
  • Events 704 and 706 are similar to the events 304 and 306.
  • the UE 102 transmits 705 at least one measurement report to the M-DU 174A, similar to the event 304.
  • the M-DU 174A transmits 707 at least one DU-to-CU message including the at least one measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306.
  • the CU 172 performs 780 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380.
  • the events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7A as an LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 781.
  • a scenario 700B similar to the scenarios 300-600B and 700A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 717, 719 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 721, 723 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A.
  • the events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 717, 719, 721, 723, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7B as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 782.
  • the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-700B.
  • the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A, a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B and a target secondary DU T- DU) 174C.
  • the CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN and operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN.
  • the CU 172 while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M- DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 880 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 881 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
  • a scenario 800B similar to the scenarios 300-700B and 800A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 817, 819 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 821, 823 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A.
  • a RAN node such as a DU or a CU to support configuring a configuration for LTM
  • a RAN node such as a DU or a CU to support configuring a configuration for LTM
  • Examples and implementations described for Figs. 3-8B can apply to Figs. 9-14B.
  • Fig. 9 illustrates an example method 900, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for performing a fast serving cell configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • the method 900 begins at block 902, where the UE communicates with a RAN via at least one serving cell using a first serving DU configuration and a first serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880).
  • a first serving DU configuration e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880.
  • the UE receives a reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, a first reference LTM DU configuration, LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, and LTM ID(s) 1, ..., N from the RAN via the at least one serving cell, where N is a positive integer and the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure cell(s) 1, ..., N, respectively (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882).
  • the UE receives, from the RAN, a second serving DU configuration and/or a second serving CU configuration.
  • the UE receives at least one message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the second serving DU configuration and/or the second serving CU configuration from the RAN.
  • the UE communicates with the RAN via the at least one serving cell in accordance with the second serving DU configuration and/or the second serving CU configuration.
  • the UE receives, from the RAN via one of the at least one serving cell, a first LTM command commanding the UE to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 (e.g., events 330, 380, 430, 480, 580, 530, 581, 582, 680, 630, 681, 682, 780, 730,
  • the UE accesses the cell 1 in response to the first LTM command (e.g., events 332, 380, 432, 480, 580, 532, 581, 582, 680, 632, 681, 682, 780, 732, 781, 782, 880, 832, 881, 882).
  • the first LTM command e.g., events 332, 380, 432, 480, 580, 532, 581, 582, 680, 632, 681, 682, 780, 732, 781, 782, 880, 832, 881, 882).
  • the UE communicates with the RAN via the cell 1 using the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration 1, the first reference LTM DU configuration, and the LTM DU configuration 1 (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882).
  • the UE receives, from the RAN, a second LTM command commanding the UE to perform a serving cell change to the cell 2 (e.g., events 350, 398, 380, 450, 498, 480, 580, 598, 581, 582, 680, 698, 681, 682, 780, 798, 781, 782, 880, 898, 881, 882).
  • the UE accesses the cell 2 in response to the first LTM command (e.g., events 352, 398, 380, 452, 498, 480, 580, 598, 581, 582, 680, 698, 681, 682, 780, 798, 781,
  • the UE communicates with the RAN via the cell 2, using the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration 1, the first reference LTM DU configuration, and the LTM DU configuration 2 (e.g., events 356, 380, 456, 480, 580, 556, 581, 582, 680, 656, 681, 682, 780, 756, 781, 782, 880, 856, 881, 882).
  • FIG. 10A illustrates an example method 1000A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • a UE e.g., the UE 102
  • a RAN e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105.
  • the method 1000A begins with block 1002, where the UE performs blocks 902, 904, and 906-920 (optional).
  • the UE receives a second reference LTM configuration from the RAN.
  • the UE determines whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1008.
  • the UE updates the first reference LTM CU configuration with the second LTM CU configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1010.
  • the flow proceeds to block 1010 from block 1006 as well as from block 1008.
  • the UE determines whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM DU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1012. At block 1012, the UE updates the first reference LTM DU configuration with the second LTM DU configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1014. At block 1014, the flow proceeds to the end.
  • the UE receives the second reference LTM configuration in ways similar to receiving a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration as described for Eigs. 3-8B.
  • Eig. 10B is a flow diagram of an example method 1000B similar to the method 1000A, except that method 1000B includes blocks 1009 and 1013 instead of block 1014. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1009. At block 1009, the UE releases the first reference LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1013. At block 1013, the UE releases the first reference LTM DU configuration.
  • Fig. 10C is a flow diagram of an example method 1000C similar to the methods 1000A and 1000B, except that method 1000C includes block 1013 instead of block 1014.
  • Fig. 10D is a flow diagram of an example method WOOD similar to the methods 1000A, 1000B, and 1000C, except that method WOOD includes block 1014 instead of block 1013.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates an example method 1100, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • a RAN e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105.
  • the method 1100 begins with block 1102, where the UE performs blocks 902, 904, and 906-920 (optional).
  • the UE receives from the RAN a second reference LTM CU configuration and/or a second reference LTM DU configuration.
  • the UE determines whether the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference LTM DU configuration. If the UE determines that the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference LTC DU configuration at block 1104, the flow proceeds to block 1106.
  • the UE replaces the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first LTM DU configuration with the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or second reference LTM DU configuration, respectively.
  • the UE receives a message (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message) including the indication, the second reference LTM CU configuration, and/or the second reference LTM DU configuration from the RAN.
  • a message e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message
  • the flow proceeds to block 1108.
  • the UE modifies the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference DU configuration with the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or second reference LTM DU configuration, respectively.
  • the UE receives the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or the second reference LTM DU configuration in ways similar to receiving a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration as described for Eigs. 3-8B.
  • Fig. 12 illustrates an example method 1200, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for performing a fast serving cell configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • a UE e.g., the UE 102
  • a RAN e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105.
  • the method 1200 begins at block 1202, where the UE communicates with a RAN via at least one serving cell, using a first serving DU configuration and a first serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880).
  • the UE receives an LTM DU configuration configuring a first cell from the RAN (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619,
  • the UE receives an LTM command ordering the UE to perform a serving cell change to the first cell from the RAN (e.g., events 330, 380, 430, 480, 580, 530, 581, 582, 680, 630, 681, 682, 780, 730, 781, 782, 880, 830, 881, 882).
  • the UE accesses the first cell in response to the LTM command (e.g., events 332, 380, 432, 480, 580, 532, 581, 582, 680, 632, 681,
  • the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the LTM DU configuration (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882).
  • the UE determines whether to receive at least one LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines to receive at least one LTM CU configuration at block 1212, the flow proceeds to block 1214.
  • the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the at least one LTM CU configuration after (e.g., in response to) receiving the LTM command (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882). Otherwise, if the UE determines not to receive at least one LTM CU configuration at block 1212, the flow proceeds to block 1216. At block 1216, the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the serving CU configuration after (e.g., in response to) receiving the LTM command.
  • the LTM command e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882. Otherwise
  • Fig. 13A illustrates an example method 1300A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration and a non-reference LTM configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • a UE e.g., the UE 102
  • a RAN e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105.
  • the method 1300A begins at block 1302, where the UE receives a reference LTM configuration and LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N from a RAN, where N is a positive integer and the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882).
  • LTM e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782
  • the UE receives a message from the RAN, where the message indicates to release at least one of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N.
  • the message is an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE releases at least one of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the message.
  • the UE determines whether there is a LTM configuration (i.e., non-reference LTM configuration) left in the UE (i.e., the UE determines whether any nonreference LTM configuration is not released). If the UE determines that there is an LTM configuration left in the UE at block 1308, the flow proceeds to block 1310.
  • the UE retains the reference LTM configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that there is no LTM configuration left in the UE at block 1308, the flow proceeds to block 1312.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration.
  • the reference LTM configuration includes a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • each of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes a (non-reference) LTM CU configuration and a (non-reference) LTM DU configuration.
  • Fig. 13B is a flow diagram of an example method 1300B similar to the method 1300A, except that method 1300B includes blocks 1305, 1307, and 1309 instead of blocks 1304 and 1306.
  • the UE receives a message from the RAN, where the message indicating releasing the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N.
  • the UE releases the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the message.
  • the UE determines whether the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration. If the UE determines that the message does not include an indication to release the reference LTM configuration at block 1309, the flow proceeds to block 1310. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration at block 1309, the flow proceeds to block 1312.
  • Fig. 14A illustrates an example method 1400A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing LTM configurations (e.g., a LTM reference configuration and/or a non-reference LTM configuration) with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
  • LTM configurations e.g., a LTM reference configuration and/or a non-reference LTM configuration
  • a RAN e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105.
  • the method 1400A begins at block 1402, where the UE communicates with a RAN using a serving DU configuration and a serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880).
  • the UE receives a reference LTM configuration and/or LTM configuration(s) 1, ..
  • the UE receives a message configuring the UE to transition to an idle state or inactive state from the RAN.
  • the message is an RRC release message.
  • the message includes a suspend configuration (e.g., SuspendConfig IE) configuring the UE to transition to the inactive state (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE state).
  • the message excludes the suspend configuration to configure the UE to transition to the idle state, (e.g., RRC_IDLE state).
  • the UE transitions to the idle state or inactive state in response to the message.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the idle or inactive state.
  • the flow proceeds to block 1410 or block 1414 from block 1408.
  • the UE releases the serving CU configuration in response to transitioning to the idle state.
  • the UE releases the serving DU configuration in response to transitioning to the idle state.
  • the UE retains the serving CU configuration or at least a portion of the serving CU configuration in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
  • the UE retains the serving DU configuration or at least a portion of the serving DU configuration in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
  • the reference LTM configuration includes a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration.
  • each of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes a (non-reference) LTM CU configuration and a (non-reference) LTM DU configuration.
  • Fig. 14B is a flow diagram of an example method 1400B similar to the method 1400A, except that method 1400B includes blocks 1407 and 1411 instead of block 1408.
  • the flow proceeds to block 1407 or block 1411 from block 1406.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the idle state.
  • the UE retains the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
  • the UE in the inactive state initiates a state transition procedure (e.g., RRC connection resume procedure) with the RAN to transition to the connected state from the inactive state.
  • a state transition procedure e.g., RRC connection resume procedure
  • the UE transmits an RRC resume request message to the RAN and receives an RRC resume message in response.
  • the UE transitions to the connected state from the inactive state and transmits a RRC resume complete message to the RAN.
  • the RAN transmits an LTM command to the UE in the connected state to order the UE to perform a serving cell change to a cell configured in one of the retained LTM configuration(s) 1, ...,N.
  • the RAN indicates to release the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in the RRC resume message.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the RRC resume message.
  • the RAN transmits, to the UE, an RRC reconfiguration message indicating to release the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the UE if the UE performs the state transition procedure on a cell different from a cell where the UE receives the message causing the UE to transition to the inactive state, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to initiating or performing the state transition procedure. Otherwise, if the UE performs the state transition procedure on the same as the cell where the UE receives the message causing the UE to transition to the inactive state, the UE retains the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N.
  • the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to initiating or performing the state transition procedure. In some implementations, the UE does so to simplify implementation of the UE because the UE does not check whether the cell where the UE performs the state transition procedure is the same as the cell where the UE receives the message transitioning the UE to the inactive state.
  • the “LTM command” can be replaced by “serving cell change command”, “Layer 1/Layer 2 switching command”, “lower layer switching command” or “lower layer serving cell change command”. In some implementations, “some” means “one or more”. In some implementations, “at least one” means “one or more”. In some implementations, the “DU configuration” can be replaced by “cell group configuration”. In some implementations, the “cell index” can be replaced with “serving cell index”, “LTM cell index”, “special cell (SpCell) index”, “PCell index” or “PSCell index”.
  • a user device in which the techniques of this disclosure can be implemented can be any suitable device capable of wireless communications such as a smartphone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a mobile gaming console, a point-of-sale (POS) terminal, a health monitoring device, a drone, a camera, a media- streaming dongle or another personal media device, a wearable device such as a smartwatch, a wireless hotspot, a femtocell, or a broadband router.
  • the user device in some cases may be embedded in an electronic system such as the head unit of a vehicle or an advanced driver assistance system (ADAS).
  • ADAS advanced driver assistance system
  • Modules may can be software modules (e.g., code, or machine- readable instructions stored on non-transitory machine-readable medium) or hardware modules.
  • a hardware module is a tangible unit capable of performing certain operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner.
  • a hardware module can comprise dedicated circuitry or logic that is permanently configured (e.g., as a special-purpose processor, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), etc.) to perform certain operations.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • a hardware module may also comprise programmable logic or circuitry (e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor) that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations.
  • programmable logic or circuitry e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor
  • the decision to implement a hardware module in dedicated and permanently configured circuitry, or in temporarily configured circuitry (e.g., configured by software) may be driven by cost and time considerations.
  • the techniques can be provided as part of the operating system, a library used by multiple applications, a particular software application, etc.
  • the software can be executed by one or more general-purpose processors or one or more special-purpose processors.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A user equipment (UE) can implement a method for managing lower layer triggered mobility protocol procedure(s). The method includes: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a centralized unit (CU) serving configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration; and communicating, at the UE, withmthe distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration.

Description

MANAGING LOWER LAYER TRIGGERED MOBILITY CONFIGURATIONS AT A USER EQUIPMENT
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority to and the benefit of the filing date of provisional U.S. Patent Application No. 63/446,329 entitled “MANAGING LOWER LAYER TRIGGERED MOBILITY CONFIGURATIONS AT A UE,” filed on February 16, 2023. The entire contents of the provisional applications are hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference.
FIELD OF THE DISCLOSURE
[0002] This disclosure relates to wireless communications and, more particularly, to managing mobility, i.e., a serving cell change, using a control signaling of a protocol layer lower than a radio resource control (RRC) protocol layer.
BACKGROUND
[0003] This background description is provided for the purpose of generally presenting the context of the disclosure. Work of the presently named inventors, to the extent it is described in this background section, as well as aspects of the description that may not otherwise qualify as prior art at the time of filing, are neither expressly nor impliedly admitted as prior art against the present disclosure.
[0004] In telecommunication systems, the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) sublayer of the radio protocol stack provides services such as transfer of user-plane data, ciphering, integrity protection, etc. For example, the PDCP layer defined for the Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (EUTRA) radio interface (see 3GPP technical specification (TS) 36.323) and New Radio (NR) (see 3GPP TS 38.323) provides sequencing of protocol data units (PDUs) in the uplink direction (from a user device, also known as a user equipment (UE), to a base station) as well as in the downlink direction (from the base station to the UE). Further, the PDCP sublayer provides signaling radio bearers (SRBs) and data radio bearers (DRBs) to the Radio Resource Control (RRC) sublayer. Generally speaking, in some examples, the UE and a base station use SRBs to exchange RRC messages as well as non-access stratum (NAS) messages, and can use DRBs to transport data on a user plane. [0005] Depending on the scenario, UEs use several types of SRBs and DRBs. When operating in dual connectivity (DC), the cells associated with the base station operating the master node (MN) define a master cell group (MCG), and the cells associated with the base station operating as the secondary node (SN) define the secondary cell group (SCG). SRB1 resources carry RRC messages, which in some cases include NAS messages over the dedicated control channel (DCCH), and SRB2 resources support RRC messages that include logged measurement information or NAS messages, also over the DCCH but with lower priority than SRB1 resources. More generally, SRB1 and SRB2 resources allow the UE and the MN to exchange RRC messages related to the MN and embed RRC messages related to the SN. The SRB1 and SRB 2 resources can be referred to as MCG SRBs. SRB3 resources allow the UE and the SN to exchange RRC messages related to the SN and can be referred to as SCG SRBs. Split SRBs allow the UE to exchange RRC messages directly with the MN via lower layer resources of the MN and the SN. Further, DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the MN can be referred as MCG DRBs, DRBs using the lower-layer resources of only the SN can be referred as SCG DRBs, and DRBs using the lower-layer resources of both the MCG and the SCG can be referred to as split DRBs.
[0006] The UE, in some scenarios, concurrently utilizes resources of multiple radio access network (RAN) nodes (e.g., base stations or components of a distributed base station), interconnected by a backhaul. When such network nodes support different radio access technologies (RATs), this type of connectivity is referred to as Multi-Radio Dual Connectivity (MR-DC). When a UE operates in MR-DC, one base station operates as a master node (MN) that covers a primary cell (PCell), and the other base station operates as a secondary node (SN) that covers a primary secondary cell (PSCell). The UE communicates with the MN (via the PCell) and the SN (via the PSCell). In other scenarios, the UE utilizes resources of one base station at a time. One base station and/or the UE determines that the UE should establish a radio connection with another base station. For example, one base station determines to hand the UE over to the second base station and initiate a handover procedure.
[0007] When the UE moves from the coverage area of one cell to another cell in a RAN, the RAN should configure the UE for a serving cell change. To perform the serving cell change, the RAN configures the UE to transmit Layer 3 (L3) measurement results. Based on L3 measurement results received from the UE, the RAN transmits an RRC reconfiguration message, configuring Reconfiguration with Synchronization (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message includes a ReconfigurationWithSync IE) for the change of the serving cell (e.g., PCell or PSCell). In cases where the UE operates in carrier aggregation (CA) of at least one secondary cell (SCell) with the PCell or PSCell, the RAN releases the at least one SCell due to the change of the PCell or PSCell. The serving cell change involves complete L2 (and LI) resets, leading to longer latency, larger overhead, and longer interruption time. Thus, it is desirable to develop new mobility techniques to reduce latency and overhead for fast serving cell change. However, it is not clear how to manage configurations of lower layer triggered mobility at the UE.
SUMMARY
[0008] An example embodiment of the techniques of this disclosure is a method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration; and communicating, at the UE, with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration.
[0009] Another example embodiment of these techniques is a method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) configuration; and releasing, at the UE and in response to transitioning to an inactive state or an idle state, the reference LTM configuration.
[0010] Another example embodiment of these techniques is an apparatus, operating as a user equipment (UE), comprising processing hardware and configured to implement the methods above.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0011] Fig. 1A is a block diagram of an example system in which a radio access network (RAN) and a user device can implement the techniques of this disclosure for managing conditional procedures related to a secondary node (SN); [0012] Fig. IB is a block diagram of an example base station including a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) that can operate in the system of Fig. 1 A;
[0013] Fig. 2A is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with base stations;
[0014] Fig. 2B is a block diagram of an example protocol stack according to which the UE of Fig. 1A communicates with a CU and a DU;
[0015] Fig. 3 is a messaging diagram of an example scenario where a CU provides a reference lower layer triggered mobility configures to a DU for generating a configuration for a UE;
[0016] Fig. 4 is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the base station includes a source DU (S-DU) and target DU (T-DU);
[0017] Fig. 5A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the UE communicates in DC with an MN and an SN;
[0018] Fig. 5B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 5A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the MN;
[0019] Fig. 6A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an S-DU and a T-DU in the SN;
[0020] Fig. 6B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 6A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the MN;
[0021] Fig. 7A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an M-DU and an S-DU;
[0022] Fig. 7B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 7A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the M-DU;
[0023] Fig. 8A is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 3, but in which the CU communicates with an M-DU, an S-DU, and a T-DU; [0024] Fig. 8B is a messaging diagram of an example scenario similar to that of Fig. 8A, but in which the CU provides the reference lower layer triggered mobility configuration to the UE via the M-DU;
[0025] Fig. 9 is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE receives a reference LTM DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration(s) for communicating with a RAN;
[0026] Fig. 10A is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to update a reference LTM configuration with a second LTM configuration based on whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference DU or CU configuration;
[0027] Fig. 10B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference LTM DU or CU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU or CU configuration;
[0028] Fig. 10C is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference DU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration;
[0029] Fig. 10D is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 10A, but in which the UE additionally releases the first reference CU configuration if the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration;
[0030] Fig. 11 is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to replace or modify a first reference LTM CU configuration and/or a first reference DU configuration based on whether the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU or DU configuration;
[0031] Fig. 12 is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to communicate with a RAN using a serving CU configuration or an LTM CU configuration based on whether the UE receives at least one LTM CU configuration; [0032] Fig. 13A is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE determines whether to retain or release a reference LTM configuration based on whether an LTM configuration remains in a UE after releasing at least one LTM configuration;
[0033] Fig. 13B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 103, but in which the UE makes the determination based on whether the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration;
[0034] Fig. 14A is a flow diagram depicting an example method, implemented in a UE, in which the UE transitions to an idle state or an inactive state and releases reference LTM configuration(s) in response; and
[0035] Fig. 14B is a flow diagram depicting an example method, similar to that of Fig. 14A, but in which the UE releases the reference LTM configurations in response to transitioning to the idle state and retains the reference LTM configurations in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0036] Fig. 1A depicts an example wireless communication system 100 in which communication devices can implement these techniques. The wireless communication system 100 includes a UE 102, a base station (BS) 104, a base station 106 and a core network (CN) 110. The UE 102 initially connects to the base station 104. In some scenarios, the base station 104 can perform an SN addition to configure the UE 102 to operate in dual connectivity (DC) with the base station 104 and the base station 106. The base stations 104 and 106 operate as an MN and an SN for the UE 102, respectively.
[0037] In various configurations of the wireless communication system 100, the base station 104 can be implemented as a master eNB (MeNB) or a master gNB (MgNB), and the base station 106 can be implemented as a secondary gNB (SgNB). The UE 102 can communicate with the base station 104 and the base station 106 via the same RAT such as EUTRA or NR, or different RATs. When the base station 104 is an MeNB and the base station 106 is a SgNB, the UE 102 can be in EUTRA-NR DC (EN-DC) with the MeNB and the SgNB. [0038] In some cases, an MeNB or an SeNB is implemented as an ng-eNB rather than an eNB. When the base station 104 is a Master ng-eNB (Mng-eNB) and the base station 106 is a SgNB, the UE 102 can be in next generation (NG) EUTRA-NR DC (NGEN-DC) with the Mng-eNB and the SgNB. When the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is an SgNB, the UE 102 may be in NR-NR DC (NR-DC) with the MgNB and the SgNB. When the base station 104 is an MgNB and the base station 106 is a Secondary ng-eNB (Sng-eNB), the UE 102 may be in NR-EUTRA DC (NE-DC) with the MgNB and the Sng-eNB.
[0039] In the scenarios where the UE 102 hands over from the base station 104 to the base station 106, the base stations 104 and 106 operate as the source base station (S-BS) and a target base station (T-BS), respectively. The UE 102 can operate in DC with the base station 104 and an additional base station (not shown in Fig. 1A) for example prior to the handover. The UE 102 can continue to operate in DC with the base station 106 and the additional base station or operate in single connectivity (SC) with the base station 106, after completing the handover. The base stations 104 and 106 in this case operate as a source MN (S-MN) and a target MN (T-MN), respectively.
[0040] A core network (CN) 110 can be an evolved packet core (EPC) 111 or a fifthgeneration core (5GC) 160, both of which are depicted in Fig. 1A. The base station 104 can be an eNB supporting an SI interface for communicating with the EPC 111, an ng-eNB supporting an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160, or a gNB that supports an NR radio interface as well as an NG interface for communicating with the 5GC 160. To directly exchange messages with each other during the scenarios discussed below, the base stations 104 and 106 can support an X2 or Xn interface. Among other components, the EPC 111 can include a Serving Gateway (SGW) 112, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) 114, and a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW) 116. The SGW 112 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc., and the MME 114 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions. The PGW 116 provides connectivity from the UE to one or more external packet data networks, e.g., an Internet network and/or an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. The 5GC 160 includes a User Plane Function (UPF) 162 and an Access and Mobility Management (AMF) 164, and/or Session Management Function (SMF) 166. The UPF 162 is generally configured to transfer user-plane packets related to audio calls, video calls, Internet traffic, etc., the AMF 164 is configured to manage authentication, registration, paging, and other related functions, and the SMF 166 is configured to manage PDU sessions.
[0041] As illustrated in Fig. 1A, the base station 104 supports cell 124A, and the base station 106 supports a cell 126. The cells 124A and 126 can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, where one of the base stations 104 and 106 is an MN and the other is an SN. The base station 104 can support additional cell(s) such as cells 124B and 124C, and the base station 106 can support additional cell(s) (not shown in Fig. 1A). The cells 124A, 124B and 124C can partially overlap, so that the UE 102 can communicate in carrier aggregation (CA) with the base station 104. The base station 104 can operate the cells 124A, 124B and 124C via one or more transmit and receive points (TRPs). More particularly, when the UE 102 is in DC with the base station 104 and the base station 106, one of the base stations 104 and 106 operates as an MeNB, an Mng-eNB or an MgNB, and the other operates as an SgNB or an Sng-eNB.
[0042] In general, the wireless communication network 100 can include any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. More particularly, the EPC 111 or the 5GC 160 can be connected to any suitable number of base stations supporting NR cells and/or EUTRA cells. Although the examples below refer specifically to specific CN types (EPC, 5GC) and RAT types (5G NR and EUTRA), in general the techniques of this disclosure also can apply to other suitable radio access and/or core network technologies such as sixth generation (6G) radio access and/or 6G core network or 5G NR-6G DC.
[0043] With continued reference to Fig. 1A, the base station 104 is equipped with processing hardware 130 that can include one or more general-purpose processors (e.g., CPUs) and a non-transitory computer-readable memory storing instructions that the one or more general-purpose processors execute. Additionally or alternatively, the processing hardware 130 can include special-purpose processing units. The processing hardware 130 can include a PHY controller 132 configured to transmit data and control signal on physical downlink (DL) channels and DL reference signals with one or more user devices (e.g. UE 102) via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs. The PHY controller 132 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical uplink (UL) channels and/or UL reference signals with the one or more user devices via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B and/or 124C) and/or one or more TRPs. The processing hardware 130 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 134 configured to perform MAC functions with one or more user devices. The MAC functions includes a random access (RA) procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and/or communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the one or more user devices. The processing hardware 130 can further include an RRC controller 136 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack. For example, the RRC controller 132 may be configured to support RRC messaging associated with handover procedures, and/or to support the necessary operations when the base station 104 operates as an MN relative to an SN or as an SN relative to an MN. The base station 106 can include processing hardware 140 that is similar to processing hardware 130. In particular, components 142, 144, and 146 can be similar to the components 132, 134, and 136, respectively.
[0044] The UE 102 is equipped with processing hardware 150 that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. The PHY controller 152 is also configured to receive data and control signal on physical DL channels and/or DL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs. The PHY controller 152 is also configured to transmit data and control signal on physical UL channels and/or UL reference signals with the base station 104 or 106 via one or more cells (e.g., the cell(s) 124A, 124B, 124C and/or 126) and/or one or more TRPs. The processing hardware 150 in an example implementation includes a MAC controller 154 configured to perform MAC functions with base station 104 or 106. Lor example, the MAC functions include a random access procedure, managing UL timing advance for the one or more user devices, and communicating UL/DL MAC PDUs with the base station 104 or 106. The processing hardware 150 can further include an RRC controller 156 to implement procedures and messaging at the RRC sublayer of the protocol communication stack.
[0045] In operation, the UE 102 in DC can use a radio bearer (e.g., a DRB or an SRB) that at different times terminates at the MN 104 or the SN 106. The UE 102 can apply one or more security keys when communicating on the radio bearer, in the uplink (UL) (from the UE 102 to a base station) and/or downlink (from a base station to the UE 102) direction. [0046] Fig. IB depicts an example distributed implementation of a base station such as the base station 104 or 106. The base station in this implementation can include a centralized unit (CU) 172 and one or more distributed units (DUs) 174. The CU 172 is equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. In one example, the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 130. In another example, the CU 172 is equipped with the processing hardware 140. The processing hardware 140 in an example implementation includes an SN RRC controller 142 configured to manage or control one or more RRC configurations and/or RRC procedures when the base station 106 operates as an SN. The DU 174 is also equipped with processing hardware that can include one or more general-purpose processors such as CPUs and non-transitory computer-readable memory storing machine-readable instructions executable on the one or more general-purpose processors, and/or special-purpose processing units. In some examples, the processing hardware in an example implementation includes a medium access control (MAC) controller configured to manage or control one or more MAC operations or procedures (e.g., a random access procedure) and a radio link control (RLC) controller configured to manage or control one or more RLC operations or procedures when the base station 106 operates as an MN or an SN. The process hardware may include further a physical layer controller configured to manage or control one or more physical layer operations or procedures.
[0047] Fig. 2A illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 200 according to which the UE 102 can communicate with an eNB/ng-eNB or a gNB (e.g., one or more of the base stations 104, 106).
[0048] In the example stack 200, a physical layer (PHY) 202A of EUTRA provides transport channels to the EUTRA MAC sublayer 204A, which in turn provides logical channels to the EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A. The EUTRA RLC sublayer 206A in turn provides RLC channels to an EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and, in some cases, to an NR PDCP sublayer 210. Similarly, the NR PHY 202B provides transport channels to the NR MAC sublayer 204B, which in turn provides logical channels to the NR RLC sublayer 206B. The NR RLC sublayer 206B in turn provides data transfer services to the NR PDCP sublayer 210. The NR PDCP sublayer 210 in turn can provide data transfer services to Service Data Adaptation Protocol (SDAP) 212 or a radio resource control (RRC) sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A). The UE 102, in some implementations, supports both the EUTRA and the NR stack as shown in Fig. 2A, to support handover between EUTRA and NR base stations and/or to support DC over EUTRA and NR interfaces. Further, as illustrated in Fig. 2A, the UE 102 can support layering of NR PDCP 210 over EUTRA RLC 206 A, and SDAP sublayer 212 over the NR PDCP sublayer 210.
[0049] The EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 receive packets (e.g., from an Internet Protocol (IP) layer, layered directly or indirectly over the PDCP layer 208 or 210) that can be referred to as service data units (SDUs), and output packets (e.g., to the RLC layer 206A or 206B) that can be referred to as protocol data units (PDUs). Except where the difference between SDUs and PDUs is relevant, this disclosure for simplicity refers to both SDUs and PDUs as “packets.”
[0050] On a control plane, the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide signaling radio bearers (SRBs) or RRC sublayer (not shown in Fig. 2A) to exchange RRC messages or non-access-stratum (NAS) messages, for example. On a user plane, the EUTRA PDCP sublayer 208 and the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can provide Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) to support data exchange. Data exchanged on the NR PDCP sublayer 210 can be SDAP PDUs, Internet Protocol (IP) packets or Ethernet packets.
[0051] Fig. 2B illustrates, in a simplified manner, an example protocol stack 250, which the UE 102 can communicate with a DU (e.g., DU 174) and a CU (e.g., CU 172). The radio protocol stack 200 is functionally split as shown by the radio protocol stack 250 in Fig. 2B. The CU at any of the base stations 104 or 106 can hold all the control and upper layer functionalities (e.g., RRC 214, SDAP 212, NR PDCP 210), while the lower layer operations (e.g., NR RLC 206B, NR MAC 204B, and NR PHY 202B) are delegated to the DU. To support connection to a 5GC, NR PDCP 210 provides SRBs to RRC 214, and NR PDCP 210 provides DRBs to SDAP 212 and SRBs to RRC 214.
[0052] Next, several example scenarios in which the base station operating in the system of Fig. 1A transmits a configuration to the UE 102 and later activates a configuration for communication between the UE 102 and base station. Generally speaking, events in Figs. 3- 7B that are similar are labeled with similar reference numbers e.g., event 316 is similar to event 416 of Figs 4A and 4B, event 516 of Fig. 5A, event 517 of Fig. 5B, event 616 of Fig. 6A, event 617 of Fig. 6B, event 716 of Fig. 7A, and event 717 of Fig. 7B), with differences discussed below where appropriate. With the exception of the differences shown in the figures and discussed below, any of the alternative implementations discussed with respect to a particular event (e.g., for messaging and processing) may apply to events labeled with similar reference numbers in other figures.
[0053] Referring first to Fig. 3, in a scenario 300, the base station 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174 and the DU 174 operates the cell 124A. The UE 102 initially communicates 302 with the DU 174 on the cell 124A using a serving DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 (e.g., using a serving CU configuration). In some implementations, the UE 102 in carrier aggregation (CA) communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., cell 124D not shown in Fig. 1A) using the serving DU configuration. The DU 174 operates the other cell(s). In other implementations, the UE 102 in communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A only. In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the cell 124A is a PCell. In such cases, the other cell(s) include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or an SCell. In other implementations, the cell 124A is an SCell, and one of the other cell(s) is a PCell. In such cases, the rest of the cells include SCell(s) and/or additional cell(s) associated with the PCell or an SCell. In the following description, depending on the implementation, the base station 104 is the DU 174, the CU 172, or the DU 174 and CU 172.
[0054] In some implementations, in the event 302, the UE 102 transmits UL PDUs and/or UL control signals to the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the base station 104 via radio bearers which include SRBs and/or DRB(s). In further implementations, the base station 104 configures the radio bearers for the UE 102. In some implementations, UL control signals include UL control information, channel state information, hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) acknowledgements (ACKs), HARQ negative ACKs, scheduling request(s), and/or sounding reference signal(s). Similarly, in further implementations the UE 102 receives DL PDUs and/or DL control signals from the base station 104 on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. In some implementations, the DL control signals include downlink control information (DCIs) and reference signals (e.g., synchronization signal block, channel state information reference signal(s) (CSI-RS(s)), and/or tracking reference signal(s)). In some implementations, the base station 104 transmits the DCIs on physical downlink control channel(s) (PDCCH(s)) monitored by the UE 102, on the cell 124A and/or other cell(s) via one or multiple TRPs. [0055] In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters to the CU 172. The CU 172 generates one or more messages (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the configuration parameters and transmits the one or more messages to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the configuration parameters to the UE 102 directly. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration is CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the serving DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE. In some implementations, the serving CU configuration includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters. In some implementations, the serving CU configuration includes a MeasConfig IE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331) or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConfig IE. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting. In other implementations, the serving CU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives the serving CU configuration or the configuration parameters in the serving CU configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174. In other implementations, the UE 102 receives a portion of the serving CU configuration and/or a portion of the serving DU configuration from a base station other than the base station 104 and the remaining portion of these configuration parameters from the base station 104.
[0056] While communicating with the base station 104, the UE 102 transmits 304 at least one measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, the at least one measurement report includes Layer 1 (LI) measurement report(s) and/or Layer 3 (L3) measurement report(s) for at least one serving cell of the UE 102 and/or at least one nonserving cell. For each of the L3 measurement report(s), the DU 174 transmits 306 a DU-to- CU message including the L3 measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message(s) of the event 306 is/are Fl application protocol (F1AP) message(s) (e.g., UL RRC Message Transfer message(s)). In some implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit or refrains from transmitting the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172. The at least one serving cell includes the cell 124A and/or other cell(s), and the at least one nonserving cell includes the cell 124B and/or cell 124C. In some implementations, the serving DU configuration or the serving CU configuration includes at least one measurement configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)) including the at least one measurement configuration from the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302. In accordance with the at least one measurement configuration, the UE 102 performs measurements and transmits 304 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)) and/or LI measurement configuration(s). In some implementations, the LI measurement configuration(s) (e.g., CSl-MeasConfig IE(s)) includes LI measurement resource configuration(s) and/or LI measurement reporting configuration(s). In further implementations, the LI measurement resource configuration(s) configure resources of reference signal(s) (e.g., CSLRS(s)) for the UE 102 to measure and obtain LI measurement results. Lor example, the LI measurement resource configuration(s) is/are CS1- ResourceConfig IE(s). In another example, the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) configure way(s) the UE 102 uses to transmit LI measurement results/reports. Lor example, the LI measurement report configuration(s) is/are CSl-ReportConfig IE(s). Lor example, the UE 102 transmits the L3 measurement report(s) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 in accordance with the L3 measurement configuration(s). The UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the LI measurement configuration(s) or LI measurement reporting configuration(s). In some implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) to the CU 172.
[0057] In some implementations, the LI measurement configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for a lower layer triggered mobility (LTM). In some implementations, the LI measurement resource configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for the LTM. In some implementations, the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) are new RRC IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later version) for the LTM. In some implementations, each of the LI measurement reporting configuration(s) includes a trigger event configuration configuring a trigger event to trigger the UE 102 to transmit an LI measurement report. If the UE 102 detects the trigger event, the UE 102 transmits an LI measurement report to the DU 174. [0058] In some implementations, (each of) the LI measurement report(s) includes at least one LI measurement result. In some implementations, the at least LI measurement result includes at least one LI -reference signal received power (Ll-RSRP) value and/or at least one LI- Signal to Interference Noise Ratio (Ll-SINR) value. For each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, in some implementations. That is, the UE 102 transmits the each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUCCH to the DU 174. In other implementations, for each of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. That is, the UE 102 transmits each of the LI measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the DU 174. In yet other implementations, the UE 102 transmits a portion of the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) and the rest of the LI measurement report(s) on physical UL shared channel(s) (PUSCH(s)) to the DU 174. That is, for each portion of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUCCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174, and for each of the remainder of the LI measurement report(s), the UE 102 transmits a PUSCH transmission including the LI measurement report to the DU 174. In some implementations, each of the LI measurement report(s) Is a part of the channel state information (CSI) (i.e., a CSI component) or CSI. In some implementations, the UE 102 includes other CSI component(s) in (each of) the PUCCH transmission(s) and/or PUSCH transmission(s) described above. In some implementations, the other CSI component(s) include a channel quality indicator (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI), a CSLRS Resource Indicator (CRI), a Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Block Indicator (SSBRI), a Layer Indicator (LI), and/or a Rank Indicator (RI). In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in the format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
[0059] In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement report(s) includes at least one L3 measurement result. In some implementations, the at least one L3 measurement result includes at least one RSRP (value) and/or at least one SINR (value). In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits each of the L3 measurement report(s) on a PUSCH to the CU 172 via the DU 174. In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement report(s) is an RRC message (e.g., MeasurementReport message). In some implementations, each of the L3 measurement configuration(s) includes a particular measurement identity (e.g., measldp and each of the L3 measurement report(s) includes a particular measurement identity in a particular L3 measurement configuration. In some implementations, when the CU 172 receives an L3 measurement report, including a measurement identity and an L3 measurement result, from the UE 102 via the DU 174, the CU 172 determines that the L3 measurement report is associated with an L3 measurement configuration identified by the measurement identity.
[0060] In some alternative implementations, for each of the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)), the UE 102 transmits a MAC control element (CE), including the measurement report, to the DU 174 in the event 304. To transmit the MAC CE(s), the UE 102 generates one or more MAC PDUs, each including one or more of the MAC CE(s), to the DU 174 in the event 304.
[0061] In some implementations, the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals in accordance with the at least one measurement configuration. Depending on the implementation, the one or more reference signals include one or more Synchronization Signal (SS)/ Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) Resource Blocks (SSBs) and/or one or more CSI-RSs. The UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements. The DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A and other cell(s) (e.g., the cell 124B, the cell 124C, and/or cell(s) not shown in Fig. 1A).
[0062] After (e.g., in response to) receiving one or some of the at least one measurement report(s) from the UE 102, the base station 104 (i.e., the CU 172 or DU 174) determines to prepare a first cell (e.g., the cell 124B) for LTM for the UE 102. In some implementations, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell could be used by the base station 104 to communicate with the UE 102. In some implementations, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the first cell qualifies to be a candidate cell that could be used for communication with the UE 102. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicates that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A, and/or is better than strength and/or quality of the cell 124A by a first predetermined threshold, the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. In other implementations, if the LI measurement report(s) indicate that signal strength and/or quality of the first cell is above a first predetermined threshold, is better than signal strength and/or quality of the cell 124 A, and/or is better than signal strength and/or quality of the cell 124A by a first predetermined threshold, the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. Alternatively, the base station 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measure report is received from the UE 102 or not.
[0063] In cases where the CU 172 determines to prepare the first cell for LTM, the CU 172 transmits 308 a first CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes a cell identity (ID) of the first cell in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the first cell for LTM for the UE 102. For example, the cell ID is cell global identity (CGI). In another example, the cell ID is a portion of the CGI. In yet another example, the cell ID is a physical cell ID (PCI). In response to the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 generates a first LTM DU configuration (referred to hereinafter as LTM DU configuration 1) for the UE 102, which configures the first cell for LTM. The DU 174 then transmits 310 a first DU-to-CU message, including the LTM DU configuration 1, to the CU 172 in response to the first CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 together with the LTM DU configuration 1 in an IE of the first DU-to-CU message to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is associated with the first cell (i.e., the cell ID 1). In cases where the DU 174 determines to prepare the first cell, the DU 174 initiates transmission of the first DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 instead of in response to a CU-to-DU message received from the CU 172.
[0064] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the cell ID of the first cell associated with the LTM DU configuration 1 to indicate that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell. The CU 172 identifies that the LTM DU configuration 1 is configured for or associated with the first cell. In some scenarios and implementations, the CU 172 includes additional cell ID(s) (e.g., cell ID(s) 2, ..., N) in the first CU-to-DU message to prepare additional cell(s) (e.g., cell(s) 2, ..., N) for LTM for the UE 102, and the DU 174 includes additional LTM DU configuration(s) (e.g., LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N), each configuring a particular cell of the additional cell(s), as described below. In such cases, the DU 174 includes, in the first DU-to-CU message, the additional cell ID(s) respectively associated with the additional LTM DU configuration(s) to indicate which LTM DU configuration is associated to which cell (ID). The cell(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N are candidate cell(s). [0065] In some implementations, the CU 172 does not include a (reference) LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N (i.e., non-reference LTM DU configuration(s)) based on the reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N, which are delta configuration(s) to augment the reference LTM DU configuration. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a first reference LTM DU configuration) in the first CU-to-DU message. In such cases, the DU 174 generates a reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., a second reference LTM DU configuration) replacing the first reference LTM DU configuration, generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N based on the second reference LTM DU configuration, and includes the second reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message.
[0066] In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes physical layer configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, and/or RLC configuration parameters. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP specification 38.331). In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and/or reporting.
[0067] In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving DU configuration, and the rest of the reference LTM DU configuration is different from the rest of the serving DU configuration. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration is the same as the serving DU configuration.
[0068] After receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates an RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., an RRCReconfiguration message), including the LTM DU configuration 1, and transmits 316 a second CU-to-DU message including the RRC reconfiguration message to the DU 174. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, the CU 172 does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In some implementations, if the CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration to the UE 102 during the event 302, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In other implementations, if the CU 172 receives the reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Otherwise, if the CU 172 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration from the DU 174, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0069] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first container (e.g., a field/IE) and includes the first container (e.g., LTM configuration 1) in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316 and 318. In such cases, the CU 172 generates the first container. The first container functions to indicate to the UE 102 not to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 immediately. In some scenarios or implementations, the UE 102 receives an RRC reconfiguration message (e.g., the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 318) including a configuration (e.g., the LTM DU configuration 1). If the configuration is included in the first container, the UE 102 refrains from immediately applying the configuration. Otherwise, in further implementations, if the configuration is not included in the first container, the UE 102 applies the configuration immediately. In some implementations, the first container is a first addition or modification list (e.g., Itm- ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm- CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddModList IE). The CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM CU configuration 1 in a first element (referred to hereinafter as element 1) of the first addition or modification list. For example, the element 1 is an addition or modification IE (Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM- ConfigToAddMod IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddMod IE). In some implementations, when the UE 102 receives the first addition or modification list, the UE 102 stores the first addition or modification list (e.g., in a variable in the random access memory (RAM)). In other alternative implementations, the DU 174 generates the first container and includes the first container in the first DU-to-CU message. In yet other alternative implementations, the DU 174 generates the element 1 and includes the element 1 in the first DU-to-CU message.
[0070] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the first container or the element 1, a LTM CU configuration 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the second container, LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the element(s) 2, ..., N, the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. Alternatively, the CU 172 does not include, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316, LTM CU configuration(s) for some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N.
[0071] After receiving the RRC reconfiguration message 316, the DU 174 transmits 318 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102. In response, the UE 102 transmits 320 an RRC reconfiguration complete message (e.g., an RRCReconfigurationComplete message) to the DU 174, which in turn transmits 322 a second DU-to-CU message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU 172 performs security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the RRC reconfiguration message. For example, the CU 172 generates a message authentication code for integrity (MAC-I) for the RRC reconfiguration message, encrypts the RRC reconfiguration message and the MAC-I to obtain an encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and an encrypted MAC-I, and transmits a PDCP PDU including the encrypted RRC reconfiguration message and encrypted MAC-I to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the events 316 and 318. When the UE 102 receives the PDCP PDU from the CU 172 via the DU 174 (i.e., events 316 and 318), the UE 102 decrypts the encrypted RRC reconfiguration and encrypted MAC-I to obtain the RRC reconfiguration message and MAC-I and verifies whether the MAC-I is valid. If the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is invalid, the UE 102 discards or ignores the RRC reconfiguration message. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs an RRC connection reestablishment procedure in response to the invalid MAC-I. Otherwise, in further implementations, if the UE 102 verifies the MAC-I is valid, the UE 102 processes the RRC reconfiguration. The UE 102 refrains from applying (i.e., executing) the LTM configuration 1 until receiving a configuration activation command activating the LTM configuration 1 (e.g., the event 330). [0072] The events 308 (optional) and 310 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM preparation procedure 390. The events 316, 318, 320, 322 are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM configuration delivery procedure 394.
[0073] In some implementations, the first CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message, and the first DU-to-CU message is a UE Context Modification Response message or UE Context Modification Required message. In some cases including the UE Context Modification Required message, the CU 172 transmits a UE Context Modification Confirm message to the DU 174 in response to UE Context Modification Required message. In some implementations, the second CU-to-DU message is a DE RRC Message Transfer message. In other implementations, the second CU-to-DU message is a UE Context Modification Request message, and the DU 174 transmits a second DU-to-CU message (e.g., UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU 172 in response to the second CU-to-DU message.
[0074] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes a reference LTM CU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 generates the LTM CU configuration 1 (i.e., non-reference LTM CU configuration) as a delta configuration to augment the reference LTM CU configuration. Similarly, in further implementations, the CU 172 generates some or all of the LTM CU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as delta configuration(s) to augment the reference LTM CU configuration.
Alternatively, in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 or the first container, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and does not include a non-reference LTM CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM CU configuration and/or the reference LTM DU configuration in an additional container (e.g., reference LTM configuration) and includes the additional container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0075] In some implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as a portion of the serving CU configuration, and the rest of the reference LTM CU configuration is different from the rest of the serving CU configuration. In yet other implementations, the reference LTM CU configuration is the same as the serving LTM CU configuration.
The CU assigns an ID for the LTM DU Configuration 1 [0076] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, a first LTM ID (referred to herein after as ID 1) for identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 or the element 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first container or element 1. In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns the ID 1. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives the ID 1 from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message, as described below.
[0077] In some implementations where the CU 172 assigns or generates the ID 1, the CU 172 transmits the ID 1 to the DU 174, and the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, in the first CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 and indicates that the ID 1 is associated with the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, after receiving the first DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 transmits 312 a third CU-to-DU message including the ID 1 to the DU 174 instead of including the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1 and the ID 1. The CU 172 further indicates the association between the ID 1 and LTM DU configuration 1. Thus, the DU 174 directly associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, in the third CU-to-DU message, the CU 172 includes the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 (i.e., the first LTM ID), and indicates the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1. Thus, in some such implementations, the DU 174 associates the ID 1 with the LTM DU configuration 1 based on the association between the cell ID 1 and the ID 1 and the association between the cell ID 1 and the LTM DU configuration 1. In yet other implementations, in the third CU-to- DU message, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration 1, the cell ID 1, and the ID 1, and indicates the association between the ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, and the cell ID 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits 314 a third DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 in response to the third CU-to-DU message. In some implementations, the third CU-to- DU message and third DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message. The events 312 (optional) and 314 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as an LTM ID assignment procedure 392. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1, the cell ID 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration 1 in the second CU-to-DU message, as described above. Thus, the CU 172 can omit the third CU-to-DU message.
[0078] In some implementations where the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the first CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container or element 1. Alternatively, the DU 174 does not include the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container and/or element 1.
DU assigns an ID for the LTM DU Configuration 1
[0079] In some alternative implementations, the DU 174 assigns the ID 1 identifying the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the first DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message as described above. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the LTM DU configuration 1, first container, or element 1. Thus, the CU 172 does not include an ID identifying the LTM DU configuration 1 in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container and/or element 1.
[0080] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container. For example, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message 316 and outside the first container. For example, the CU 172 generates a third container (e.g., a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the third container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the first container. For example, the DU 174 includes the reference LTM DU configuration in a field of the first container, different from a field of the first container including the LTM DU configuration 1. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 generates a fourth container (e.g., a field/IE) to include the first container and the reference LTM DU configuration and includes the fourth container in the first DU-to-CU message 310. In such cases, the CU 172 includes the fourth container in the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 retrieves the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 from the fourth container and includes the reference LTM DU configuration and the LTM DU configuration 1 as described above.
[0081] In some implementations, neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, neither the CU 172 nor the DU 174 assign an ID to identify the reference LTM CU configuration. [0082] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a plurality of configuration parameters for the UE 102 to communicate with the DU 174 on the first cell. In some implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters includes physical layer configuration parameters (e.g., PhysicalCellGroupConfig IE), MAC layer configuration parameters (e.g., MAC-CellGroupConfig IE), and/or RLC configuration parameters (e.g., RLC-BearerConfig IE(s)). In some further implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters includes a special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
[0083] In some implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes PDCP configuration parameters, measurement configuration parameters, and/or radio bearer configuration parameters. In some implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes a MeasConfig IE and/or a RadioBearerConfig IE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331) or includes configuration parameters in the MeasConfig IE and/or RadioBearerConfig IE. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting. In other implementations, the LTM CU configuration 1 includes a CSl-MeasConfig IE or configuration parameters for channel state information (CSI) measurement and reporting.
[0084] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the random access configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the random access configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration, as described below. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the random access configuration, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the random access configuration.
[0085] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes random access configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the reference LTM DU configuration regardless of whether the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized or not. The UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 in accordance with the random access configuration parameters, as described below.
[0086] In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include, in the LTM DU configuration 1, a first indication configuring the UE 102 not to perform a random access procedure on the first cell. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the first indication in the LTM DU configuration 1. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the first indication, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332 in accordance with or in response to the first indication. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the first indication, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in accordance with the random access configuration in the event 332, in response to the LTM DU configuration 1 excluding the first indication, as described below.
[0087] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not include a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) in the LTM DU configuration 1 or special cell configuration. In some implementations, if the cell 124A and first cell are not synchronized, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the cell 124A and first cell are synchronized, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In other implementations, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has not synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. Otherwise, if the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 has synchronized in UL with the first cell, the DU 174 determines to not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332 as described below, in response to or in accordance with the reconfiguration with sync configuration. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the reconfiguration with sync configuration, the UE 102 skips or refrains from performing the random access procedure of the event 332. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a cell ID (i.e., cell ID 1) of cell 1 (i.e., the first cell) in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the cell ID 1 is a PCI. In another implementation, the cell ID 1 is a CGI. In some implementations, the cell ID 1 included in the LTM DU configuration 1 is a PCI, while the cell ID 1 included in the first CU-to-DU message is a CGI. In some further implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 or the first cell (e.g., the cell index 1 is not a cell ID). The cell index takes fewer bits than the cell ID. In some implementations, the CU 172 sets the cell index 1 to a value and includes the cell index 1 in the first CU-to-DU message of the event 308.
[0088] In some implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving one or some of the at least one measurement report of the event 304, the base station 104 (i.e., the CU 172 or DU 174) determines to prepare additional cell(s) (i.e., cell(s) 2, ..., N) of the base station 104 for LTM for the UE 102. In some implementations, the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM for the UE 102 because the at least one measurement report indicates that the base station 104 can use the additional cell(s) to communicate with the UE 102. In some implementations, the additional cell(s) include the cell 124C and/or cell(s) other than the cells 124A, 124B, and 124C. In some implementations, if the L3 measurement report(s) indicate that signal strength and/or quality of a particular cell of the additional cell(s) is above a respective predetermined threshold and/or is better than the cell 124A, the CU 172 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102. In other implementations, if the LI measurement report(s) indicate that signal strength and/or quality of a particular cell of the additional cell(s) is above a first predetermined threshold and/or is better than the cell 124A, the DU 174 determines to prepare the particular cell for LTM for the UE 102. In some implementations, the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cells are different from the first predetermined threshold. In further implementations, the respective predetermined threshold(s) for the additional cell(s) are the same as the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the respective predetermined thresholds for the additional cells are the same or different. Alternatively, the base station 104 determines to prepare the additional cell(s) for the UE 102 regardless of whether a measurement report is received from the UE 102 or not.
[0089] In cases where the CU 172 determines to prepare the additional cell(s), the CU 172 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure with the DU 174 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390. In cases where the DU 174 determines to prepare the additional cell(s), the DU 174 initiates and performs at least one additional LTM preparation procedure with the CU 172 to prepare the additional cell(s) for LTM, where each of the LTM preparation procedure(s) is similar to the procedure 390.
[0090] In some implementations, the CU 172 and DU 174 perform LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N to prepare the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, similar to the procedure 390. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N in CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, similar to the first CU-to-DU message. In the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, the DU 174 generates LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N configuring the cell(s) 2, ..., N and includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in DU-to-CU message(s) 2, .., N, respectively, as described for the LTM DU configuration 1. In cases where the DU 174 receives the CU-to- DU message(s) 2, ..., N, the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N responds to the CU-to-DU message(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. “N” is an integer and larger than one. Lor example, “N” is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 14, 15, 16, etc. In another example, the maximum number of “N” is 4, 8, 16, 32, etc. Examples and implementations of the LTM DU configuration 1 can apply to the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N.
[0091] In other implementations, the CU 172 and DU 174 performs a single LTM preparation procedure (i.e., the LTM preparation procedure 390) to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N. In such cases, the DU 174 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N for the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively in the first DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, in the first DU-to-CU message, the DU 174 includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N respectively 1 associated with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, 2, ..., N are configured for the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively. In cases where the CU 172 determines to perform the LTM preparation procedure 390, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 1, 2, ..., N in the first CU-to-DU message to request the DU 174 to prepare the cell(s) 1, 2, ..., N, respectively, for LTM.
[0092] In some implementations, after receiving the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N from the DU 174, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in element(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, and includes the element(s) 2, ..., N in the first container. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message, LTM ID(s) (i.e., ID(s) 2, ..., N) for identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first container. For example, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N and LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the element(s) 2, ..., N in the first addition or modification list.
[0093] In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns the ID(s) 2, ..., N for the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 receives the ID(s) 2, ..., N from the DU 174 in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 receives, from the DU 174, the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the DU- to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, ..., N, respectively.
[0094] In some implementations, the CU 172 performs an LTM ID assignment procedure with the DU 174 for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, similar to the procedure 392. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicates the association between the ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. Thus, in some implementations, the DU 174 associates the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N with the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the third CU-to-DU message and indicates the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. Thus, in further implementations, the DU 174 associates the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N with the ID(s) 2, ..., N, respectively, based on the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the ID(s) 2, ..., N, and the association between the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N and the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, .. N, the cell ID(s) 2, .. N and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, .. N in the second CU-to-DU message as described above. Thus, the CU 172 can omit the third CU-to- DU message. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first CU-to-DU message and indicates that the ID(s) 2, ..., N are respectively associated with the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N. Thus, the CU 172 does not include the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container, and/or element(s) 2, ..., N.
[0095] In some alternative implementations, the DU 174 assigns the ID(s) 2, ..., N. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the first DU-to-CU message of the procedure 390. In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the DU-to-CU message(s) 2, ..., N of the LTM preparation procedure(s) 2, .. ,,N. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N. Thus, the CU 172 does not include an ID (e.g., LTM ID) identifying each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N in the RRC reconfiguration message, first container, and/or element 1.
[0096] In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 generates a second container including the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N or element(s) 2, ..., N instead of using the first container. The CU 172 then transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration message, including the second container, to the UE 102 via the DU 174, similar to the events 316 and 318. In response, the UE 102 transmits an additional RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the events 320 and 322. In some implementations, the second container is a second addition or modification list (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddModList field, LTM-ConfigToAddModList IE, Itm-CandidateConfigToAddModList field, or LTM- CandidateConfigToAddModList IE), and each of the element(s) 2, ..., N is an addition or modification IE (e.g., Itm-ConfigToAddMod field, LTM-ConfigToAddMod l , Itm- CandidateConfigToAddMod field, or LTM-CandidateConfigToAddMod IE). In some implementations, when the UE 102 receives the second addition or modification list, the UE 102 stores the second addition or modification list together with the first addition or modification list (e.g., in a variable in the random access memory (RAM)).
[0097] In some implementations, the DU 174 includes cell ID(s) 2, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N to identify the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In some implementations, each of the cell ID(s) 2, .. N is a PCI. In some further implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N includes cell index(es) 2 , ..., N indexing the cell ID(s) 2, ..., N or the cell(s) 2, ..., N, respectively. In some cases where the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, ..., N for LTM in the procedure 390, the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 2, ..., N to different value(s) and includes the cell index(es) 2, ..., N in the first CU-to CU-to-DU message of the event 308. In some cases where the CU 172 prepares the cell(s) 2, ..., N in the additional LTM preparation procedure(s), the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 2, ..., N to different values and includes the cell index(es) 2, ..., N in CU-to-DU message(s) of the additional LTM preparation procedure(s). The CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ..., N to different values. In some implementations, the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are different from the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message(s) described above.
[0098] In some implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes physical configuration parameters, MAC configuration parameters, RLC configuration parameters, and/or LI measurement configuration(s). In some implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N is a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters included in a CellGroupConfig IE (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In some further implementations, the plurality of configuration parameters in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) include a particular special cell configuration (e.g., SpCellConfig IE) and/or one or more SCell configurations (e.g., SCellConfig IE(s)). In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are CellGroupConfig IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters in the CellGroupConfig IE.
[0099] In some implementations, the CU 172 includes one or more additional LTM CU configurations in at least one of the element(s) 2, ..., N, the first container, or the second container. Each of the additional LTM CU configurations are associated with a particular LTM DU configuration of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N. Examples and implementations of the additional LTM CU configurations are similar to the LTM CU configuration 1.
[0100] In some implementations, the CU 172 determines to release the LTM DU configuration M of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N (or the element M of the element(s) 1, .. M), where 1 < M < N. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits an RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the DU 174 to indicate to the UE 102 to release the LTM DU configuration M or element M. In some implementations, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M for releasing the LTM DU configuration M or element M and includes the release list in the RRC reconfiguration message. In response to the RRC reconfiguration message, the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration M or element M and transmits an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the CU 172 via the DU 174. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to- DU message to the DU 174 to indicate to the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M. In some implementations, to indicate to the DU 174 to release the LTM DU configuration M, the CU 172 includes the cell ID M or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) M in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the CU-to-DU message. In response, the DU 174 releases the LTM DU configuration M and transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively.
[0101] In other implementations, the DU 174 determines to release the LTM DU configuration K. In response to the determination, the DU 174 transmits a DU-to-CU message to the CU 172 to release the LTM DU configuration K. In some implementations, to indicate that the LTM DU configuration K is released, the DU 174 includes the cell ID K or the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K in a release indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the DU-to-CU message. Eurther, 1 < K < N. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message, the CU 172 generates a release list including the ID (i.e., LTM ID) K to release the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits an RRC reconfiguration message including the release list to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In response, the UE 102 releases the LTM DU configuration K or element K and transmits an RRC reconfiguration complete message to the UE 102 via the DU 174. In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 in response to the DU-to-CU message. In some implementations, the DU-to-CU message and CU-to-DU message are a UE Context Modification Required message and a UE Context Modification Confirm message, respectively.
[0102] After receiving the RRC reconfiguration in the event 318 or transmitting the RRC reconfiguration complete message in the event 320, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits 326 a DU-to-CU message, including the at least one measurement report, to the CU 172, similar to the event 306. In other implementations, the DU 174 does not transmit the at least one measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the at least one measurement report of the event 324 includes LI measurement report(s) or L3 measurement repot(s), as described for the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report on PUCCH(s) and/or PUSCH(s) to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In other implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 at least one MAC CE including the at least one measurement report to the DU 174, similar to the event 304. In some implementations, the UE 102 does not transmit the LI measurement report(s) in format of RRC message(s) to the DU 174.
[0103] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits 324 the at least one measurement report to the DU 174 in accordance with at least one measurement configuration. The at least one measurement configuration configures the UE 102 to perform measurements and report measurement results. The CU 172 transmits the at least one measurement configuration to the UE 102 via the DU 174. For example, the CU 172 transmits one or more RRC messages (e.g., RRCReconfiguration message(s)), including the at least one measurement configuration, to the UE 102 via the DU 174 in the event 302 and/or 316 and/or after the event 306 or 316. Depending on the implementation, the one or more RRC messages do or do not include the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316. In accordance with the at least one measurement configuration, the UE 102 performs measurements on one or more reference signals. In some implementations, the one or more reference signals include one or more SSBs and/or one or more CSLRSs. The UE 102 obtains the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result from the measurements and includes the at least one LI measurement result and/or at least one L3 measurement result in the at least measurement report of the event 324. The DU 174 transmits the one or more reference signals on the cell 124A, the cell 1, and/or the cell(s) 2, ..., N. Depending on the implementation, the one or more reference signals are CSLRS(s) or SSB(s).
[0104] In some implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes L3 measurement configuration(s) (e.g., MeasConfig IE(s)), as described for the event 304. In other implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes LI measurement configuration(s), as described for the event 304. For example, the LI measurement configuration(s) are CSI-MeasConfig IE(s) (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.331 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions). In some implementations, the LI measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s). The UE 102 transmits the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). The DU 174 receives the LI measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). In some implementations, the measurement report configuration(s) are CSl-ReportConfig IE(s). In other implementations, each of the measurement report configuration(s) is a new RRC IE. In some implementations, (each of) the measurement report configuration(s) configures periodically reporting and/or event-triggered reporting of the LI measurement result(s).
[0105] In yet other implementations, the at least one measurement configuration includes new-type measurement configuration(s) (e.g., LTM measurement configuration(s)). In some implementations, the new-type measurement configuration(s) are newly defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS v 18.0.0 and/or later versions). In some implementations, the new-type measurement configuration(s) include reference signal resource configuration(s) configuring resources where the DU 174 transmits reference signal(s). For example, the reference signal resource configuration(s) include CSI-RS(s) and/or SSB(s). In some implementations, the reference signal resource configuration(s) are CSl-ResourceConfig IE(s). In another implementation, the new-type measurement configuration(s) include measurement report configuration(s), as described above. The UE 102 transmits the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) to the DU 174 in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). The DU 174 receives the measurement report(s) on PUCCH(s) or MAC CE(s) in accordance with the measurement report configuration(s). In some such cases, the measurement report(s) are LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s) (e.g., LTM measurement report(s)). In some implementations, the new-type measurement configuration includes configuration parameters newly defined (e.g., in a 3GPP TS v 18.0.0 and/or later versions).
[0106] After (e.g., in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report in the event 324, the DU 174 generates a first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 (i.e., the first LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 1 or to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1). The DU 174 then transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124A to the UE 102. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits the first LTM command on the cell 124D to the UE 102. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the ID 1 in the first LTM command to indicate the LTM DU configuration 1, and the UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 in accordance with the ID 1. In other implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell index 1 indexing the cell ID 1 in the first LTM command. The UE 102 determines (e.g., identifies) the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 based on the cell index 1. After determining the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1, the UE 102 then applies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM CU configuration 1 in response to receiving the first LTM command.
[0107] In yet other implementations, the DU 174 includes a bit map in the first LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 1, instead of the ID 1 or cell index 1. The number of bits in the bit map is larger than or equal to “N”. In some implementations, bit 1, ..., N corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, the ID(s) 1, ..., N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, or the element(s) 1, ..., N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 1) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1, or the element 1. Thus, in some such implementations, the UE 102 determines the cell index 1, ID 1, LTM DU configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit 1 set to the first value in the bit map. In further implementations, bit 0, ..., N-l corresponds to the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, the ID(s) 1, ..., N, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, or the element (s) 1, ..., N, respectively, and the DU 174 sets a corresponding bit (e.g., bit 0) in the bit map to a first value to indicate the cell index 1, the ID 1, the LTM DU configuration 1, or the element 1. Thus, in some such implementations, the UE 102 determines the cell index 1, ID 1, LTM configuration 1, or element 1 in accordance with the bit 0 set to the first value in the bit map. In such implementations, the DU 174 sets the remaining bits in the bit map to a second value to indicate that the rest of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N are not activated. In some implementations, the first value is one and the second value is zero. In other implementations, the first value is zero and the second value is one. Generally, depending on the implementation, if the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration L or change a serving cell to the cell L, the DU 174 sets the corresponding bit (e.g., bit L or bit L-7) in the bit map to the first value and sets the remaining bits to the second value, where 1 <L < N. In some implementations, the DU 174 sets at most one bit in the bit map to the first value.
[0108] In some implementations, the at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s) or new-type measurement report(s)) of the event 324 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell, TRP(s) of the first cell or reference signal(s) transmitted on the first cell. In some implementations, the reference signal(s) are CSI-RS(s) or SSB(s). The DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, based on the at least one measurement result. In some implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 because, when, or if the at least one measurement result is above a second predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the at least one measurement result includes Ll-RSRP value(s), Ll-RSRQ value(s) and/or Ll-SINR value(s). In other implementations, the at least one measurement result includes RSRP value(s), RSRQ value(s), and/or SINR value(s) for the new-type measurement report(s). In some implementations, the second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In this case, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In another implementation, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold. In such cases, the at least one measurement result indicates that the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold. Such indicates that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. Thus, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to the signal strength or quality of the first cell being above the second predetermined threshold for the UE 102.
[0109] In some implementations, the at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) of the events 324 and 326 includes at least one measurement result for the first cell. The CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command, because the at least one measurement result indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is above a second predetermined threshold. The second predetermined threshold is different from the first predetermined threshold. In some implementations, the second predetermined threshold is larger than the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. In further implementations, the second predetermined threshold is equal to the first predetermined threshold. In such an implementation, the at least one measurement report of the event 326 indicates that signal strength or quality of the first cell has been continuously above the second predetermined threshold or the first predetermined threshold, further indicating that the first cell is suitable for communication with the UE 102. Thus, the CU 172 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in response to the signal strength or quality of the first cell being above the second predetermined threshold. In response to the determination, the CU 172 transmits 328 a fourth CU-to-DU message to the DU 174 to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a serving cell change to the cell 1 for the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to- DU message. In response to the fourth CU-to-DU message, the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command to the UE 102 and, optionally, transmits a fourth DU-to-CU message to the CU 172. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, in some such implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell index 1. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the cell ID 1. In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID 1 in the fourth CU-to-DU message. Thus, in some such implementations, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1. In some implementations, the fourth CU-to-DU message and fourth DU-to-CU message are a UE Context Modification Request message and a UE Context Modification Response message, respectively. In other implementations, the fourth CU-to- DU message and/or fourth DU-to-CU message are new interface messages (e.g., Fl application protocol (F1AP) messages (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.473 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions)).
[0110] In some implementations, when or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit 330 the first LTM command, the DU 174 transmits 329 to the CU 172 a DU-to-CU message indicating that LTM is (being) executed. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 or the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to- CU message 329 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a fast serving cell change. Depending on the implementation, the DU transmits the DU-to-CU message 329 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 330.
[0111] In some implementations, the first LTM command is a MAC CE included in a MAC PDU that the UE 102 receives from the DU 174 in the event 330. In some implementations, the MAC CE is a new MAC CE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions). In some implementations, the DU 174 includes a subheader identifying the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU, and the UE 102 identifies the new MAC CE in the MAC PDU in accordance with the subheader. In some implementations, the subheader includes a logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS) to identify the new MAC CE. For example, the logical channel ID or extended logical channel ID are newly defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions). In other implementations, the first LTM command is a DO that the UE 102 receives on a PDCCH from the DU 174 in the event 330. The DU 174 generates a CRC for the DO, scrambles the CRC with a first C-RNTI of the UE 102, and transmits the DCI and scrambled CRC on the PDCCH in the event 330. In some implementations, a format of the DCI is an existing DCI format (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS (e.g., 38.212)). In further implementations, the format of the DCI is a new DCI format (e.g., defined in a 3GPP TS (e.g., 38.212 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions)).
[0112] In some implementations, the DU 174 does not perform security protection (e.g., integrity protection and/or encryption) on the first LTM command. This speeds up processing the first LTM command in the UE 102 because the UE 102 does not perform a security check (e.g., decryption and/or integrity check) on the first LTM command.
[0113] In some implementations, after receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 transmits 331 an acknowledgement to the DU 174 on the cell 124A or cell 124D to indicate that the UE 102 receives the first LTM command. In some implementations, the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK. In other implementations, the acknowledgement is a MAC CE. For example, the MAC CE is an existing MAC CE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl7.2.0 and/or later versions). In another example, the MAC CE is a new MAC CE (e.g., defined in 3GPP TS 38.321 vl8.0.0 and/or later versions). In yet other implementations, the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission.
[0114] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits 316 the RRC reconfiguration message in response to the L3 measurement report 306 for the first cell. In some implementations, to configure the UE 102 to transmit the L3 measurement report 306, the CU 172 transmits a first RRC reconfiguration message, including the L3 measurement configuration (e.g., a MeasConfig IE), to the UE 102 before the event 306. In some implementations, the DU 174 transmits 330 the first LTM command in response to the LI measurement report(s) 324 for the first cell. In some implementations, to configure the UE 102 to transmit the LI or new-type measurement report(s) 324, the CU 172 transmits a second RRC reconfiguration message including the LI or new-type measurement configuration(s) to the UE 102. In some implementations, the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are the same message (i.e., the same instance). In other implementations, the first and second RRC reconfiguration messages are different messages. In some implementations, the second RRC reconfiguration message is the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316. In other implementations, the second RRC reconfiguration message is different from the RRC reconfiguration message of the event 316.
[0115] After (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 in accordance with the ID 1 and applies the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs 332 a random access procedure on the first cell with the DU 174 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, the UE 102 disconnects from the cell 124A after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or after transmitting the acknowledgement. In other words, the UE 102 stops communicating on the cell 124A after (e.g., in response to) receiving 330 the first LTM command or transmitting 331 the acknowledgement. In such cases, the UE 102 performs 332 the random access procedure after disconnecting from the cell 124A. In some implementations, the UE 102 determines whether to perform the random access procedure in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure, the UE 102 performs the random access procedure in the event 332. For example, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a reconfiguration with sync configuration (e.g., ReconfigurationWithSync IE) to configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not configure the UE 102 to perform a random access procedure or configures the UE 102 to skip a random access procedure, the UE 102 refrains from performing a random access procedure with the DU 174 upon receiving the first LTM command. In such cases, the UE 102 skips the event 316. For example, if the LTM DU configuration 1 excludes a reconfiguration with sync configuration, the LTM DU configuration 1 configures the UE 102 not to perform a random access procedure. In some implementations, the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure. In some implementations, the random access procedure is a contention-free random access procedure. In other implementations, the random access procedure is a contention-based random access procedure. [0116] In cases where the UE 102 performs 332 the random access procedure, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and reference LTM DU configuration, and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174, after successfully completing the random access procedure. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 in the event 332 and/or event 336. In some scenarios or implementations, the UE 102 communicates UL PDUs, DL PDUs, and/or physical layer signals (e.g., PUCCH transmissions and PDCCH transmissions) with the base station 104 in the event 336. In some implementations, the UE 102 determines that the UE 102 successfully completes the random access procedure when the UE 102 receives a contention resolution from the DU 174. In cases where the random access procedure is a four-step random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits a Message 3 including a UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure. In cases where the random access procedure is a two-step random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits a Message A including the UE identity to the DU 174 via the first cell in the random access procedure. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 includes a second C-RNTI, the UE identity is the second C-RNTI of the UE 102. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include a C-RNTI, the UE identity is the first C-RNTI. In cases where the random access procedure is a contention free random access procedure, the UE 102 transmits the dedicated random access preamble to the DU 174 via the first cell. In such cases, the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the dedicated random access preamble.
[0117] The DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the UE identity or the dedicated preamble from the UE 102 in the random access procedure 332.
[0118] In cases where the UE 102 skips the random access procedure, the UE 102 directly communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command. For example, the UE 102 directly communicates UL PDUs, DL PDUs, and/or physical layer signals (e.g., PUCCH transmissions and PDCCH transmissions) with the base station 104 in the event 336. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes, in the LTM DU configuration 1, configuration parameters configuring resources for the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, and the UE 102 transmits the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources, using the configuration parameters, to indicate that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In other implementations, the DU 174 transmits, to the UE 102, at least one DCI on a PDCCH on the first cell to command the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, after transmitting the first LTM command. The at least one DCI configures resources for the UE 102 to transmit the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission, and the UE 102 transmits the at least one PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources. The DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the PUCCH or PUSCH transmission. The DU 174 identifies or determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the PUCCH or PUSCH transmission on the resources configured in the LTM DU configuration 1 or the at least one DCI.
[0119] In cases where the UE 102 receives the reference LTM DU configuration as described above, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with configuration parameters in the LTM DU configuration 1 and the reference LTM DU configuration.
[0120] In cases where the UE 102 receives neither the LTM CU configuration 1 nor a reference LTM CU configuration, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 neither transmits the LTM CU configuration 1 nor the reference CU configuration to the UE 102, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving CU configuration. In cases where the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. [0121] In cases where the UE 102 receives the LTM CU configuration 1 and does not receive the reference LTM CU configuration from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicates 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 instead of the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a full configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102. In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration. If the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the LTM CU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the LTM CU configuration 1. In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM CU configuration from the base station 104, the UE 102 determines that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. Correspondingly, if the CU 172 determines to configure or configures the LTM CU configuration 1 as a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the CU 172 does not transmit the reference LTM CU configuration to the UE 102. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration by excluding the first indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration by excluding the second indication in the LTM CU configuration 1, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316. [0122] In cases where the UE 102 receives the reference LTM CU configuration and does not receive the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration instead of the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 and CU 172 determine that the reference LTM CU configuration 1 is a full configuration (e.g., as defined in 3GPP TS 38.331). In other implementations, the CU 172 includes a first indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration. If the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration, the UE 102 and CU 172 communicate 336 with each other via the DU 174 using the reference LTM CU configuration and at least a portion of the serving CU configuration not augmented by the reference LTM CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration by excluding the first indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316. Alternatively, the CU 172 includes a second indication (e.g., a field or IE) in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, or the RRC reconfiguration message 316 to indicate that the reference LTM CU configuration is a delta configuration to augment the serving CU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 indicates that the reference LTM CU configuration is a full configuration by excluding the second indication in the reference LTM CU configuration, the first container, the element 1, and/or the RRC reconfiguration message 316.
[0123] In cases where the UE 102 neither receives the reference LTM CU configuration nor the LTM CU configuration 1 from the CU 172, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration. In such cases, the CU 172 communicates 336 with the UE 102 via the DU 174 using the serving LTM CU configuration.
[0124] In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits an RRC message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration complete message) to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell to indicate that the UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations where the UE 102 performs the random access procedure 332, the UE 102 includes the RRC message in the Message 3 or Message A. Alternatively, the UE 102 transmits the RRC message after completing the random access procedure. In cases where the UE 102 skips the random access procedure 332, the UE 102 includes the RRC message in a PUSCH transmission of the at least one PUSCH transmission. In some implementations, if the UE 102 maintains communication on the cell 124A with the base station 104 (i.e., the UE 102 does not disconnect from the cell 124A), the UE 102 transmits the RRC message to the base station 104 via the cell 124A. When the DU 174 receives the RRC message, the DU 174 transmits the RRC message to the CU 172.
[0125] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from transmitting the RRC message to the base station 104 in response to applying the LTM DU configuration 1 or receiving the first LTM command. In some such cases, the UE 102 includes or transmits data in the Message 3, Message A or PUSCH transmission as described above. In some implementations, the UE 102 generates a MAC PDU and/or an RLC PDU, including the data, and transmits or includes the MAC PDU and/or RLC PDU in the PUSCH transmission. For example, depending on the implementation, the data is a PDCP PDU, an SDAP PDU, an LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) PDU, an RRC PDU, and/or a NAS PDU. The RRC PDU includes a UL-DCCH-Message excluding an RRC reconfiguration complete message. The NAS PDU includes a Mobility Management (MM) message or a Session Management (SM) message. Depending on the implementation, the MM message is a 5G MM message or a 6G MM message, and the SM message is a 5G SM message or a 6G SM message. When the DU 174 receives the data, the DU 174 transmits the data to the CU 172.
[0126] In some implementations, when the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connects to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 transmits 334 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., Access Success message) to the CU 172 (e.g., a CP of the CU 172). In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 1 of the first cell in the DU-to-CU message of the event 334. In some implementations, the cell ID is a PCI or a CGI. Thus, the CU 172 determines that the UE 102 connects to the first cell upon receiving the DU-to-CU message of the event 334. In some implementations, when the DU 174 determines that the UE 102 successfully connect to the first cell in the event 332 or 336, the DU 174 transmits a DL Data Delivery Status message or frame to the CU 172 (e.g., a UP of the CU 172). In some implementations, when or after the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 329, the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174 until receiving the DU-to-CU message 334. In some such implementations, the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission because the DU 174 does not buffer DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332. After receiving the DU-to-CU message 334, the CU 172 continues or resumes transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. In other implementations, when the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 329, the CU 172 continues transmitting DL data for the UE 102 to the DU 174. In some such implementations, the CU 172 continues transmission because the DU 174 buffers DL data for the UE 102 during the LTM execution in the events 330 and/or 332. When or after the DU 174 detects that the UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the DU 174 transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
[0127] In some implementations, when determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell, transmitting 330 the first LTM command, or receiving 331 the acknowledgement, the DU 174 stops communicating with the UE 102 on the cell 124A and/or releases resources of the cell 124 A configured for the UE 102.
[0128] In some implementations, the DU 174 generates some or all of the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s) to replace the serving DU configuration. If the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 instead of the serving DU configuration. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes an indication that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration in the LTM DU configuration 1. In some implementations, in each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the DU 174 includes an indication to indicate that the corresponding DU configuration is a full configuration. In some implementations, each of the indication(s) in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N is a field or IE (i.e., the same field or IE). In other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the RRC reconfiguration message of the events 316, 318, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In some cases, for the second container, the CU 172 includes, in the additional RRC reconfiguration message, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the first container, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, for each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the CU 172 includes, in the first container, a particular indication that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In some cases, for the second container, the CU 172 includes, in the second container, a single indication that the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N is/are full configuration(s). In yet other implementations, the CU 172 includes, in the element 1, an indication that the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration. In some implementations, in each of the element(s) 2, ..., N, the CU 172 includes an indication that the corresponding LTM DU configuration is a full configuration. In some implementations, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N are full configuration(s) based on the indication(s) above. In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is different from fullConfig field (e.g., as defined in the current 3GPP TS). In some implementations, each of the indication(s) above is fullConfig field (e.g., as defined in the current 3GPP TS). In cases where the LTM DU configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 in the event 336 does not apply the reference LTM DU configuration if received from the base station 104 (e.g., in the RRC reconfiguration message 318). In some such cases, the DU 174 does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the first DU-to-CU message 310.
[0129] In other implementations, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as delta configuration(s) that augment at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In other words, the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. ,N based on the reference LTM DU configuration. For example, if the LTM DU configuration 1 is a delta configuration, the UE 102 and DU 174 augment at least the portion of the reference LTM DU configuration with the LTM DU configuration 1. Thus, the UE 102 and DU 174 communicate 336 with each other in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and unaugmented portion of the reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2..., N, first container, second container, or element(s) 1, ..., N exclude indication(s) indicating that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2..., N are full configuration(s) to indicate that the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N are delta configuration(s). In some implementations, the UE 102 determines that each of the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ... , N is a delta configuration based on the indication being excluded in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N, first container, second container, or element(s) 1 and/or 2, ..., N.
[0130] In some implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, N are full configuration(s). Correspondingly, if the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1, and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as full configuration(s).
[0131] In other implementations, if the UE 102 does not receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N, the UE 102 determines that the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N are delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the UE 102 communicates 336 with the DU 174 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and at least a portion of the serving DU configuration not augmented by LTM DU configuration 1. Correspondingly, if the DU 174 does not obtain a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 (i.e., the DU 174 does not generate a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 and/or receive a reference LTM DU configuration for the UE 102 from the CU 172), the DU 174 generates the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or the LTM DU configuration(s) 2, ..., N as delta configuration(s) to augment the serving DU configuration. In such cases, the DU 174 communicates 336 with the UE 102 in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and the at least a portion of the serving DU configuration.
[0132] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses a UE MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) to communicate with a DU MAC entity (e.g., MAC 204B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330, and/or 331). In some implementations, the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In some implementations, the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0133] In some implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the UE MAC entity (i.e., UE MAC reset or full UE MAC reset): (i) initialize Bj for configured logical channel(s) to zero; (ii) stop one or more timers; (iii) consider timeAlignmentTimeris) as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (iv) set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (v) set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1; (vi) flush Msg3 buffer; (vii) flush MSGA buffer; (viii) cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure; (ix) cancel, if any, triggered Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (x) cancel, if any, triggered Power Headroom Reporting procedure; (xi) cancel, if any, triggered consistent LBT failure; (xii) cancel, if any, triggered BFR; (xiii) cancel, if any, triggered Sidelink Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (xiv) cancel, if any, triggered Pre-emptive Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (xv) cancel, if any, triggered Timing Advance Reporting procedure; (xvi) cancel, if any, triggered Recommended bit rate query procedure; (xvii) cancel, if any, triggered configured uplink grant confirmation; (xviii) cancel, if any, triggered configured sidelink grant confirmation; (xix) cancel, if any, triggered Desired Guard Symbol query; (xx) cancel, if any, triggered Positioning Measurement Gap Activation/Deactivation Request procedure; (xxi) flush soft buffers for DL HARQ process(es); (xxii) for each of the DL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission; (xxiii) release, if any, Temporary C- RNTI; and/or (xiv) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0134] In some implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the DU MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset or full DU MAC reset): (i) stop one or more timers; (ii) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (iii) set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iv) flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); (v) for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission; and/or (vi) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0135] Depending on implementations, the UE 102 determines to partially or fully reset the UE MAC entity. In some implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 fully resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a full UE MAC reset). In the full UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs some or all of the actions described above. In other implementations, when the UE 102 resets the UE MAC entity as described above, the UE 102 partially resets the UE MAC entity (i.e., a partial UE MAC reset). In the partial UE MAC reset, the UE 102 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full UE MAC reset. [0136] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions: (i) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) of the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1); (ii) flush Msg3 buffer; (iii) flush MSGA buffer; (iv) release, if any, Temporary C-RNTI; and/or (v) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0137] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions: (i) cancel, if any, triggered Scheduling Request procedure; (ii) cancel, if any, triggered Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (iii) cancel, if any, triggered Power Headroom Reporting procedure; (iv) cancel, if any, triggered consistent LBT failure; (v) cancel, if any, triggered BFR; (vi) cancel, if any, triggered Sidelink Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (vii) cancel, if any, triggered Pre-emptive Buffer Status Reporting procedure; (viii) cancel, if any, triggered Timing Advance Reporting procedure; (ix) cancel, if any, triggered Recommended bit rate query procedure; (x) cancel, if any, triggered configured uplink grant confirmation; (xi) cancel, if any, triggered configured sidelink grant confirmation; (xii) cancel, if any, triggered Desired Guard Symbol query; and/or (xiii) cancel, if any, triggered Positioning Measurement Gap Activation/Deactivation Request procedure.
[0138] In some implementations, the partial UE MAC reset further includes at least one of the following actions: (i) stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers; (ii) set new data indicator(s) (NDI(s)) for UL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iii) set NDI(s) for HARQ process ID(s) to value 0 for monitoring PDCCH in Sidelink resource allocation mode 1; (iv) flush soft buffers for DL HARQ process(es); and/or (v) for each of the DL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission;
[0139] Depending on implementations, the DU 174 determines to partially or fully reset the DU MAC entity. In some implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 fully resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a full DU MAC reset). In the full DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs some or all of the actions described above. In other implementations, when the DU 174 resets the DU MAC entity as described above, the DU 174 partially resets the DU MAC entity (i.e., a partial DU MAC reset). In the partial DU MAC reset, the DU 174 performs a subset or portion of the some or all of the actions in the full DU MAC reset. [0140] In some implementations, the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions in the partial MAC reset: (i) consider limeAlignmenlTimer( ) that the DU 174 starts and/or maintains for the UE 102 as expired if the UE 102 is configured to perform the random access procedure (e.g., the event 332) in the configuration (e.g., the configuration 1) and/or (ii) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0141] In some implementations, when the partial DU MAC reset includes at least one of the following actions for the MAC entity (i.e., DU MAC reset): (i) stop a first portion of the one or more timers and retain the rest of the one or more timers; (ii) set NDI(s) for DL HARQ process(es) to value 0; (iii) flush soft buffers for UL HARQ process(es); (iv) for each of the UL HARQ process(es), consider the next received transmission for a TB as the very first transmission; and/or (v) reset one or more counters (e.g., BFI_COUNTERs and/or LBT_COUNTERs).
[0142] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from resetting the UE MAC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. Similarly, the DU 174 refrains from resetting the DU MAC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the UE MAC entity (not reset). Similarly, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the DU MAC entity (not reset) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0143] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses at least one UE RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) to communicate RLC PDUs with at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., RLC 206B) of the DU 174 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330 and/or 331). In some implementations, the UE 102 reestablishes some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command and before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In some implementations, the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell.
[0144] In some implementations, the LTM DU configuration 1 does or does not include one or more RLC reestablishment indications (e.g., reestablishRLC field(s)) configuring the UE 102 to reestablish some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity. If the LTM DU configuration 1 includes the an RLC reestablishment indication configuring the UE 102 to reestablish a first UE RLC entity of the at least one UE RLC entity that the UE 102 uses to communicate RLC PDU(s) with the DU 174, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity in response to the RLC reestablishment indication and the first LTM command. In some implementations, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity before performing 332 the random access procedure or communicating 336 with the DU 174 via the first cell. In other implementations, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity while or after performing 332 the random access procedure. Otherwise if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity in response to the first LTM command.
[0145] In some implementations, when the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 performs at least one of the following actions for the first UE RLC entity: (i) discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any; (ii) stop and reset timer(s), if running; and/or (iii) reset state variables to initial values. In some implementations, the state variables and timer(s) are pre-defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.322).
[0146] Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication for the first UE RLC entity, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In other words, the UE 102 refrains from preforming the actions for reestablishing the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command. In some implementations, if the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and includes an indication that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 reestablishes the first UE RLC entity of the UE 102 upon or when receiving the first LTM command. Otherwise, if the LTM DU configuration 1 or element 1 does not include the RLC reestablishment indication and the indication indicating that the configuration 1 is a full configuration, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing the first UE RLC entity upon or when receiving the first LTM command.
[0147] Similarly, the DU 174 reestablishes some or all of at least one DU RLC entity (e.g., NR RLC 206B) that the DU 174 uses to communicate with the at least one UE RLC entity of the UE 102 (e.g., the events 302, 304, 318, 320, 324, 330, and/or 331) in response to the RLC reestablishment indication. In some implementations, the DU 174 reestablishes a first DU RLC entity of the at least one DU RLC entity after transmitting the first LTM command, receiving an acknowledgement for the first LTM command from the UE 102, or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In some implementations, the acknowledgement is a HARQ ACK. In other implementations, the acknowledgement is a MAC CE. In yet other implementations, the acknowledgement is a PUCCH transmission. In some implementations, when the base station 104 reestablishes the first DU RLC entity, the DU 174 performs at least one of the following actions for the first DU RLC entity: (i) discard RLC SDU(s), RLC SDU segment(s), and RLC PDU(s), if any; (ii) stop and reset timer(s), if running; and/or (iii) reset state variables to initial values. In some implementations, the state variables and timer(s) are pre-defined (e.g., in 3GPP TS 38.322).
[0148] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. Similarly, the DU 174 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one DU RLC entity after (e.g., in response to) transmitting the first LTM command, receiving the acknowledgement 331 or determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity (not reestablished). Lor example, the some or all of the at least one UE RLC entity includes the first UE RLC entity and/or a second UE RLC entity. Similarly, the DU 174 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity (not reestablished) on the first cell during or after the random access procedure 332 or after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell. Lor example, the some or all of the at least one DU RLC entity includes the first DU RLC entity and/or a second DU RLC entity.
[0149] In some implementations, the UE 102 uses at least one UE PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) to communicate UL PDCP PDUs and/or DL PDCP PDUs with at least one CU PDCP entity (e.g., PDCP 210) of the CU 172 in the event 302. In some implementations, the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command. For example, the UE 102 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for a first UE PDCP entity of the at least one UE PDCP entity, after or in response to receiving the first LTM command. Depending on the implementation, in the PDCP recovery procedure, the UE 102 does or does not reestablish the first UE PDCP entity. In some implementations, after or in response to performing the PDCP recovery procedure, the UE 102 retransmits at least a portion of the UL PDCP PDUs to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336. Similarly, the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command. For example, the CU 172 performs a PDCP recovery procedure for a first CU PDCP entity of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after or in response to transmitting the first LTM command. In some implementations, the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 334. In other implementations, the CU 172 performs the PDCP recovery procedure for the first CU PDCP entity in response to receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message. Depending on the implementation, in the PDCP recovery procedure, the CU 172 does or does not reestablish the first CU PDCP entity. In some implementations, after or in response to performing the PDCP recovery procedure, the CU 172 retransmits at least a portion of the DL PDCP PDUs to the UE 102 via the DU 174 and the first cell in the event 336.
[0150] In other implementations, the UE 102 refrains from reestablishing some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity in response to receiving the first LTM command. For example, the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity. Similarly, the CU 172 refrains from reestablishing some or more of the at least one CU PDCP entity, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DU-to-CU message 329 or 340 or after (e.g., in response to) receiving the DL Data Delivery Status message. In other words, the UE 102 communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 and the first cell using the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity (not reestablished). For example, the some or all of the at least one UE PDCP entity includes the first UE PDCP entity and/or a second UE PDCP entity. Similarly, the CU 172 communicates with the UE 102 using the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity (not reestablished) via the DU 174 and the first cell. For example, the some or all of the at least one CU PDCP entity includes the first CU PDCP entity and/or a second CU PDCP entity.
[0151] In some implementations, after determining that the UE 102 connects to the first cell, the CU 172 transmits 338 a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Request message) to the DU 174 to indicate to the DU 174 to stop communicating with the UE 102 and/or to release or suspend resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102. In some implementations, in response, the DU 174 stops communicating on the cell 124A with the UE 102 and/or releases or suspends resources, of the cell 124A, configured for the UE 102, and transmits 340 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Modification Response message) to the CU-172. The events 338 (optional) and 340 (optional) are collectively referred to in Fig. 3 as a resource release procedure 396. [0152] Depending on the implementation, after or while communicating with the DU 174 on the first cell, events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354, and/or 356 occur, similar to the events 324, 326, 328, 330, 331, 332, 334, and/or 336, respectively. The UE 102 transmits 344 at least one measurement report to the DU 174. The at least one measurement report includes at least one measurement result for a second cell (i.e., the cell 2). The at least one measurement result indicates that the second cell is suitable for communication with UE 102 and/or the first cell is not suitable for communication with the UE 102. After (e.g., in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report, the DU 174 determines to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 and generates a second LTM command to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 (i.e., the second LTM command commands the UE 102 to apply the LTM DU configuration 2). The DU 174 then transmits 350 the second LTM command to the UE on the first cell to the UE 102.
[0153] In some implementations, when or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 2 or transmit the second LTM command, the DU 174 transmits 349 to the CU 172 a DU-to-CU message indicating LTM (being) executed. In some implementations, the DU 174 includes the cell ID 2 or the ID 2 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU-to-CU message 349 to indicate that the DU 174 is to activate the LTM DU configuration 2. In some implementations, the DU transmits the DU-to-CU message 349 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 350.
[0154] The descriptions for the events 324, 326, 328, 330, 331, 332, 334, and/or 336 can be applied to the events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354, and/or 356 with simple changes. Lor example, “ cell 124A”, “first LTM command”, “first cell”, “ID 1”, “LTM DU configuration 1” and/or “LTM CU configuration 1” are replaced with “first cell”, “second LTM command”, “second cell”, “ID 2”, “LTM DU configuration 2”, and/or “LTM CU configuration 2”, respectively.
[0155] The events 344, 346, 348, 350, 351, 352, 354 are collectively referred to in Eig. 3 as an LTM execution procedure 398. The events 304, 306, 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336, 396, 398, 356 are collectively referred to in Eig. 3 as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 380.
[0156] Referring next to Eig. 4, in a scenario 400, the base station 104 includes a CU 172, a source DU (S-DU) 174A, and a target DU (T-DU) 174B. The S-DU 174A operates the cell 124A and optionally additional cell(s), while the T-DU 174B operates a first cell (e.g., cell 124C). The scenario 400 is similar to the scenario 300. Thus, the descriptions for the scenario 300 can generally apply to the scenario 400. The differences between the scenarios 300 and 400 are described below.
[0157] Initially, the UE 102 communicates 402 with the S-DU 174A on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A. During the communication 402, the UE 102 transmits 404, 406 at least one measurement report (e.g., L3 measurement report(s)) to the CU 172 via the S-DU 174A. Based on the at least one measurement report, the CU 172 determines to prepare cell(s) 1, ..., N (operated by the T-DU 174B) for LTM for the UE 102, where N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1. The cell(s) 1, ..., N are identified by cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively. In response to the determination, the CU 172 performs 490 an LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B to prepare and/or request the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM for the UE 102. In some implementations, N is a positive integer larger than 0 or 1. In the LTM preparation procedure 490, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message, including the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, to the T- DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM for the UE 102, similar to the event 308. In response, the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the CU 172, similar to the event 310. The LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure the cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM, respectively. In particular, the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) 1, ..., N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU-to-DU message and DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490 are a UE Context Setup Request message and UE Context Setup Response message, respectively. The CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in an RRC reconfiguration message in an LTM configuration delivery procedure 494, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394. In some implementations, the T-DU 174B includes cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 sets the cell index(es) 1, ..., N to different values and includes the cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the CU- to-DU message of the procedure 490.
[0158] In some implementations, after performing the LTM preparation procedure 490, the CU 172 performs additional LTM preparation procedure(s) with the T-DU 174B to prepare cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM for the UE 102, where M is a positive integer larger than zero. In further implementations, the CU 172 determines to do so based on one or more measurement reports received from the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the events 404, 406. In the additional LTM preparation procedure(s), the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message including cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the T-DU 174B to request the T-DU 174B to prepare the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM for the UE 102. The cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identify the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively. In response to the CU-to-DU message, the T-DU 174B transmits a DU-to-CU message including the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the CU 172. The LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M configure the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M for LTM, respectively. In particular, the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M include configuration parameters for communication on the cell(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively. The CU 172 then transmits the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M in an RRC reconfiguration message in an additional LTM configuration delivery procedure, similar to the LTM configuration delivery procedure 394 or 494.
[0159] In some implementations, the LTM preparation procedure 490 is a UE Context Setup procedure, and the additional LTM preparation procedure is a UE Context Modification procedure.
[0160] In some implementations, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3. In the procedure 380, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A performs the procedure(s) 390 and/or 392 to prepare cell(s) of the S-DU 174A for LTM for the UE 102. Depending on the implementation, the value N in the procedure 380 or described for Fig. 3 is same as or different from the value N described for Fig. 4. In some implementations, in the procedure 390, the CU 172 receives the first DU-to-CU message including the reference LTM DU configuration from the S-DU 174A in the event 310. In other implementations, the CU 172 and S-DU 174A do not perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102. In some such cases, the CU 172 performs a reference LTM DU configuration query procedure with the S-DU 174A to obtain a reference LTM DU configuration. In the procedure 488, the CU 172 transmits 460 a CU-to-DU message to the S-DU 174A to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes an indication in the CU-to-DU message to request or query a reference LTM DU configuration. In response to the indication or CU-to-DU message 460, the S-DU 174A transmits 462 a DU-to-CU message, including a reference LTM DU configuration, to the CU 172. In some implementations, the indication is a reference LTM DU configuration query indication. In other implementations, the indication is an LTM indication, and the CU 172 includes a query indication (e.g., GNB-DU Configuration Query IE) in the CU-to-DU message. After receiving the reference LTM DU configuration (i.e., either in the procedure 390 or in the procedure 488), the CU 172 includes the reference LTM DU configuration (e.g., received from the S-DU 174A) in the CU-to-DU message in the LTM preparation procedure 490. The T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, .. N based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172. In such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490. In cases regarding the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B does not include a reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure. In some implementations, the CU 172 does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in a CU-to-DU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure with the T-DU 174B. In cases regarding the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration received from the CU 172.
[0161] In some implementations, the CU 172 does not provide a reference LTM DU configuration to the T-DU 174B in the LTM preparation procedure 490. In such cases, the T- DU 174B generates a reference LTM DU configuration and generates the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N based on the reference LTM DU configuration. In such cases, the T-DU 174B includes the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the procedure 490. The CU 172 transmits the reference LTM DU configuration in the RRC reconfiguration message in the procedure 490. In cases regarding the additional LTM preparation procedure, the T-DU 174B generates the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M based on the reference LTM DU configuration. In some such cases, the T-DU 174B does not include the reference LTM DU configuration in the DU-to-CU message in the additional LTM preparation procedure. In some implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration that the T-DU 174B generates is different from the reference LTM DU configuration that the S-DU 174A generates. In other implementations, the reference LTM DU configuration that the T-DU 174B generates is the same as the reference LTM DU configuration that the S-DU 174A generates.
[0162] In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns ID(s) 1, ..., N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N (e.g., received from the T-DU 174B), respectively, and performs the procedure 492 with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ..., N to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392. Thus, the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) 1, ..., N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) 1, ..., N identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N (e.g., generated by the T-DU 174B), respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, .. N in the DU-to-CU message of the procedure 490, similar to the event 310. In some implementations, the CU 172 assigns ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively, and performs a procedure (similar to the procedure 492) with the T-DU 174B to provide the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the T-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 392. Thus, the T-DU 174B associates the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively. In other implementations, the T-DU 174B assigns ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M identifying the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively and includes the ID(s) 1, ..., N in the DU-to-CU message of the additional LTM preparation procedure, similar to the event 310.
[0163] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits 412 a CU-to-DU message, including the ID(s) 1, ..., N, to the S-DU 174A and receives 414 a DU-to-CU message from the S-DU 174A in response. The CU-to-DU message 412 and DU-to-CU message 414 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as an LTM ID transfer procedure or an LTM cell index transfer procedure 493. In some implementations, the message 412 and message 414 are a UE Context Modification Request message and UE Context Modification Response message, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or cell ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the ID(s) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In further implementations, the CU 172 includes the cell index(es) 1, ..., N in the CU-to-DU message 412. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 performs multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU- to-DU message similar to the message 412. Thus, the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) 1, ..., N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, respectively. In other alternative implementations, the CU 172 performs multiple LTM cell index transfer procedures to transmit the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N to the S-DU 174A. In the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the cell index(es) 1, ..., N, cell ID(s) 1, ..., N, and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU-to-DU message, similar to the message 412. Thus, the S- DU 174A associates the cell index(es) 1, N with the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, N and/or the cell ID(s) 1, .. N, respectively.
[0164] In some implementations, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message, including the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, to the S-DU 174A and receives a DU-to-CU message from the S- DU 174A in response, similar to the CU-to-DU message 412 and the DU-to-CU message 414, respectively. In some implementations, the CU 172 includes the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M in the CU-to-DU message. In some alternative implementations, the CU 172 performs multiple LTM ID transfer procedures to transmit the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M to the S-DU 174A. In each of the procedures, the CU 172 includes particular portion of the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N in a CU-to-DU message similar to the message 412. Thus, the S-DU 174A associates the ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M with the LTM DU configuration(s) N+l, ..., N+M and/or the cell ID(s) N+l, ..., N+M, respectively.
[0165] In some implementations, in cases where the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the ID(s) 1, ...., N and the ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400. In some implementations, in cases where the CU 172 and S-DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell ID(s) 1, ...., N and the cell ID(s) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400. In some implementations, in cases where the CU 172 and S- DU 174A perform the procedure 380 with the UE 102, value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ..., N of the procedure 380 are different from value(s) of the cell index(es) 1, ...., N and the cell index(es) N+l ,...., N+M described for the scenario 400.
[0166] In some implementations, later in time, the UE 102 transmits 424 at least one measurement report to the S-DU 174A, similar to the event 324. The at least one measurement report (e.g., LI measurement report(s)) includes an event ID, first measurement result(s) for the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B, and/or second measurement result(s) for the cell 124A. In some implementations, the first measurement result(s) are or include RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 1. Likewise, in some implementations, the second measurement result(s) are or include RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR that the UE 102 obtains from reference signal(s) transmitted on the cell 124A. In some implementations, the event ID, RSRP, RSRQ, and/or SINR are Ll-event ID, Ll-RSRP, Ll-RSRQ, and/or Ll-SINR, respectively. In some implementations, based on the first measurement result(s) and/or second measurement result(s), the S-DU 174A transmits 430 a first LTM command (i.e., LTM command 1), including the ID 1, to the UE 102 to order the UE 102 to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 of the T-DU 174B. In some implementations, the first LTM command includes the ID 1. In other implementations, the first LTM command includes the cell index 1. When the UE 102 receives the first LTM command, the UE 102 performs a serving cell change to the cell 1 from a serving cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1. Depending on the implementation, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command, the UE 102 does or does not perform 432 a random access procedure with the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 332. In some implementations, after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or completing the random access procedure 432, the UE 102 communicates 436 with the T-DU 174B on the first cell using the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or reference LTM DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the T-DU 174B, similar to the event 336. In some implementations, if a serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380, the serving cell is the cell 1 or cell 2 of the S-DU 174A. Otherwise, if no serving cell change occurs in the procedure 380 or the procedure 380 is not performed, the serving cell is the cell 124A. If the first LTM command includes the ID 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1 and/or cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1) based on the ID 1, as described with regard to Eig. 3. If the first LTM command includes the cell index 1, the UE 102 identifies the LTM DU configuration 1, cell ID 1 (i.e., the cell 1), and/or LTM ID 1 based on the cell index 1, as described with regard to Eig. 3. The UE 102 applies the LTM DU configuration 1 to communicate with the T-DU 174B after (e.g., in response to) receiving the first LTM command or successfully accessing the cell 1.
[0167] In some implementations, when or in response to determining to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or transmit the first LTM command 430, the S-DU 174A transmits 429, to the CU 172, a DU-to-CU message indicating that LTM is being executed. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A includes the cell ID 1 or the ID 1 (i.e., LTM ID) in the DU- to-CU message 429 to indicate that the S-DU 174A is to activate the LTM DU configuration 1 or trigger a fast serving cell change. In some implementations, the S-DU 174A transmits the DU-to-CU message 429 to the CU 172 before or after transmitting the LTM command 430. In some implementations, when or after the CU 172 receives the DU-to-CU message 429, the CU 172 stops or suspends transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the S-DU 174A until receiving the DU-to-CU message 434. After receiving the DU-to-CU message 434, the CU 172 starts, continues, or resumes transmission of DL data for the UE 102 to the T-DU 174B. When or after the T-DU 174B detects that the UE 102 accesses the cell 1, the T-DU 174B transmits the DL data to the UE 102 via the cell 1.
[0168] The resource release procedure 496 can be similar to the procedure 396. Alternatively, in some implementations, in the resource release procedure 496, the CU 172 transmits a CU-to-DU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Command message) to the S-DU 174A to release a UE context of the UE 102. In response, the S-DU 174A releases a UE context of the UE 102 and transmits 440 a DU-to-CU message (e.g., a UE Context Release Complete message) to the CU-172.
[0169] The events 380, 404, 406, 490, 492, 494, 494, 424, 426, 428, 429, 430, 431, 432, 434, 436, 496, 498, 456 are collectively referred to in Fig. 4 as an LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 480.
[0170] Referring next to Fig. 5A, in a scenario 500A, the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN. The SN 104 includes a CU 172 and a DU 174. The scenario 500A is similar to the scenario 300, except that the scenario 500A is a DC scenario and the scenario 300 is a single connectivity (SC) scenario. The MN 106 can include a CU and a DU similar to the base station 104 of Fig. 3.
[0171] Initially, the UE 102 in DC communicates with the MN 106 and with the SN 104. In the event 502, the UE 102 communicates with the DU 174 on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the DU 174 using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302. In some alternative implementations, the UE 102 does not communicate with the CU 172 via the DU 174 in the event 302. In some implementations, the UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 and/or SN 104 via radio bearers which, depending on the implementation, include SRBs and/or DRB(s). In some implementations, the MN 106 and/or the SN 104 configure the radio bearers to the UE 102. The UE 102 in DC communicates 502 UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the SN 104 on an SCG (i.e., SCG radio resources) that the SN 104 configures for communication with the UE 102. The UE 102 in DC communicates UL PDUs and/or DL PDUs with the MN 106 on an MCG (i.e., MCG radio resources) in accordance with an MN configuration (i.e., MCG configuration). In some implementations, the serving DU configuration is an SN configuration (i.e., SCG configuration). In the MN configuration, the MN 106 configures the MCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 126 and/or other cell(s)) operated by the MN 106. In the serving DU configuration, the SN 106A configures the SCG which includes at least one serving cell (e.g., the cell 124A and/or other cell(s)) operated by the SN 104. In some implementations, the MN configuration includes multiple configuration parameters, and the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the MN 106. As described for Fig. 3, the serving DU configuration includes multiple configuration parameters. In some implementations, the UE 102 receives the configuration parameters in one or more RRC messages from the SN 104 (e.g., via the MN 106 and/or on an SRB (e.g., SRB3) that the MN 106 or SN 104 configures to exchange RRC messages between the UE 102 and the SN 104).
[0172] In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the MN 106 performs 580 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480. In some implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 transmits the at least one measurement report to the CU 172 via the DU 174 and cell 124A in the events 504 and 506, similar to the events 304 and 306, respectively. In other implementations, while communicating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the UE 102 transmits 505 at least one measurement report to the MN 106 via the cell 126. The MN 106 in turn transmits 507 the at least one measurement report to the CU 172. In some implementations, the MN 106 generates at least one SN message, including the at least one measurement report, and transmits the at least one SN message to the CU 172 in the event 507. In some implementatoins, the at least one SN message include RRC Transfer message(s) and/or SN Modification Request message(s).
[0173] After (e.g., in response to) receiving the at least one measurement report or while the SN 104 communicates with the UE 102, the SN 104 determines to prepare the first cell for the UE 102, as described for Fig. 3. The events 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, and 556 are similar to the events 390, 392, 394, 324, 326, 328, 329, 330, 331, 332, 334, 336, 396, 398, and 356, respectively. After receiving the first LTM command 530, transmitting the acknowledgement 531, or determining that the UE 102 successfully connects to the first cell 532 or 536, the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 536 with the DU 174 on the first cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 1 and communicates 536 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 336. In some implementations, later in time, the DU 174 and/or CU 172 performs the LTM execution procedure 598 with the UE 102 to command the UE 102 to perform a cell change from the first cell to the second cell, similar to the procedure 398 or 498. As a result of the procedure 598, the UE 102 operating in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104 communicates 556 with the DU 174 on the second cell in accordance with the LTM DU configuration 2 and communicates 556 with the CU 172 via the DU 174, similar to the event 356.
[0174] The events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5A as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 581.
[0175] Referring next to Fig. 5B, a scenario 500B is generally similar to the scenario 500A, except that the SN 104 transmits 517, 519 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 521, 523 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106. The RRC reconfiguration message 517, 519 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 316, 318. The RRC reconfiguration complete message 521, 523 is similar to the RRC reconfiguration message 320, 322. In some implementations, the SN 104 generates a first SN message (e.g., SN Modification Required message, SN Modification Required message, or RRC Transfer message), including the RRC reconfiguration message, and transmits the first SN message to the MN 106 in the event 517. The MN 106 generates an MN RRC message including the RRC reconfiguration message and transmits 519 the MN RRC message to the UE 102. In response, the UE 102 generates an MN RRC response message including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits 521 the MN RRC response message to the MN 106. In some implementations, the MN 106 generates a second SN message (e.g., SN Reconfiguration Complete message or RRC Transfer message) including the RRC reconfiguration complete message and transmits the second SN message to the SN 104 in the event 523. In some implementations, the MN RRC message and MN RRC response message are an RRC reconfiguration message and an RRC reconfiguration complete message, respectively.
[0176] The events 504, 506, 505, 507, 590, 592, 594, 517, 519, 521, 523, 524, 526, 528, 529, 530, 531, 532, 534, 536, 596, 598, 556 are collectively referred to in Fig. 5B as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 582. [0177] Referring next to Fig. 6A, in a scenario 600A, the base station 106 operates as an MN, and the base station 104 operates as an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-500B. The SN 104 includes a CU 172, an S-DU 174A and a T-DU 174B, similar to the base station 104 in the scenario 400. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the MN 106 and SN 104, the MN 106 performs 680 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102, similar to the procedures 380 and/or 480. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 681 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A or S-DU 174B, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
[0178] Referring next to Fig. 6B, a scenario 600B is similar to the scenarios 300-500B and 600A, except that that the SN 104 transmits 617, 619 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the MN 106 and receives 621, 623 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the MN 106.
[0179] Referring next to Fig. 7A, in a scenario 700A, the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-600B. The base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A and a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B. The CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as an MN, similar to the base station 104 in the Fig. 3 or the MN 106 in Figs. 5A-6B, and the CU 172 operates with the S-DU 174B as an SN, similar to the SN 104 in Figs. 5A-6B.
[0180] In the scenario 700A, the UE 102 initially communicates 702 in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B and communicates 702 with the CU 172 via the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B. In the event 702, the UE 102 communicates with the S-DU 174B on cell 124A using a serving DU configuration and communicates with the CU 172 via the S-DU 174B using a serving CU configuration, similar to the event 302. Events 704 and 706 are similar to the events 304 and 306. In some implementations, the UE 102 transmits 705 at least one measurement report to the M-DU 174A, similar to the event 304. The M-DU 174A in turn transmits 707 at least one DU-to-CU message including the at least one measurement report to the CU 172, similar to the event 306. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 780 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380. [0181] The events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7A as an LTM configuration and/or activation procedure 781.
[0182] Referring next to Fig. 7B, a scenario 700B similar to the scenarios 300-600B and 700A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 717, 719 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 721, 723 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A.
[0183] The events 704, 706, 705, 707, 790, 792, 794, 717, 719, 721, 723, 724, 726, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 734, 736, 796, 798, 756 are collectively referred to in Fig. 7B as an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure 782.
[0184] Referring next to Fig. 8A, in a scenario 800A, the base station 104 operates as an MN and an SN, similar to the scenarios 300-700B. The base station 104 includes a CU 172, a master DU (M-DU) 174A, a secondary DU (S-DU) 174B and a target secondary DU T- DU) 174C. The CU 172 operates with the M-DU 174A as a MN and operates with the S-DU 174B as a SN. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M- DU 174A and S-DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 880 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 380. In some implementations, while the UE 102 communicates in DC with the M-DU 174A and S- DU 174B, the CU 172 performs 881 an LTM DU configuration and/or activation procedure with the UE 102 via the S-DU 174A, similar to the procedure 581 or 582.
[0185] Referring next to Fig. 8B, a scenario 800B similar to the scenarios 300-700B and 800A, except that that the CU 172 transmits 817, 819 the RRC reconfiguration message to the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A and receives 821, 823 the RRC reconfiguration complete message from the UE 102 via the M-DU 174A.
[0186] Next, several example methods, that can be implemented in a RAN node such as a DU or a CU to support configuring a configuration for LTM, are discussed next with reference to Figs. 9-14B. Examples and implementations described for Figs. 3-8B can apply to Figs. 9-14B.
[0187] Fig. 9 illustrates an example method 900, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for performing a fast serving cell configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105). [0188] The method 900 begins at block 902, where the UE communicates with a RAN via at least one serving cell using a first serving DU configuration and a first serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880). At block 904, the UE receives a reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, a first reference LTM DU configuration, LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N, and LTM ID(s) 1, ..., N from the RAN via the at least one serving cell, where N is a positive integer and the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure cell(s) 1, ..., N, respectively (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882). At block 906, the UE receives, from the RAN, a second serving DU configuration and/or a second serving CU configuration. Lor example, the UE receives at least one message (e.g., RRC reconfiguration message(s)) including the second serving DU configuration and/or the second serving CU configuration from the RAN.
[0189] At block 908, the UE communicates with the RAN via the at least one serving cell in accordance with the second serving DU configuration and/or the second serving CU configuration. At block 910, the UE receives, from the RAN via one of the at least one serving cell, a first LTM command commanding the UE to perform a serving cell change to the cell 1 (e.g., events 330, 380, 430, 480, 580, 530, 581, 582, 680, 630, 681, 682, 780, 730,
781, 782, 880, 830, 881, 882). At block 912, the UE accesses the cell 1 in response to the first LTM command (e.g., events 332, 380, 432, 480, 580, 532, 581, 582, 680, 632, 681, 682, 780, 732, 781, 782, 880, 832, 881, 882). At block 914, the UE communicates with the RAN via the cell 1 using the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration 1, the first reference LTM DU configuration, and the LTM DU configuration 1 (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882). At block 916, the UE receives, from the RAN, a second LTM command commanding the UE to perform a serving cell change to the cell 2 (e.g., events 350, 398, 380, 450, 498, 480, 580, 598, 581, 582, 680, 698, 681, 682, 780, 798, 781, 782, 880, 898, 881, 882). At block 918, the UE accesses the cell 2 in response to the first LTM command (e.g., events 352, 398, 380, 452, 498, 480, 580, 598, 581, 582, 680, 698, 681, 682, 780, 798, 781,
782, 880, 898, 881, 882). At block 920, the UE communicates with the RAN via the cell 2, using the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or LTM CU configuration 1, the first reference LTM DU configuration, and the LTM DU configuration 2 (e.g., events 356, 380, 456, 480, 580, 556, 581, 582, 680, 656, 681, 682, 780, 756, 781, 782, 880, 856, 881, 882). [0190] Fig. 10A illustrates an example method 1000A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
[0191] The method 1000A begins with block 1002, where the UE performs blocks 902, 904, and 906-920 (optional). At block 1004, the UE receives a second reference LTM configuration from the RAN. At block 1006, the UE determines whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1008. At block 1008, the UE updates the first reference LTM CU configuration with the second LTM CU configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1010. The flow proceeds to block 1010 from block 1006 as well as from block 1008. At block 1010, the UE determines whether the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM DU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration includes a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1012. At block 1012, the UE updates the first reference LTM DU configuration with the second LTM DU configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1014. At block 1014, the flow proceeds to the end.
[0192] In some implementations, the UE receives the second reference LTM configuration in ways similar to receiving a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration as described for Eigs. 3-8B.
[0193] Eig. 10B is a flow diagram of an example method 1000B similar to the method 1000A, except that method 1000B includes blocks 1009 and 1013 instead of block 1014. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM CU configuration at block 1006, the flow proceeds to block 1009. At block 1009, the UE releases the first reference LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines that the second reference LTM configuration does not include a second reference LTM DU configuration at block 1010, the flow proceeds to block 1013. At block 1013, the UE releases the first reference LTM DU configuration. [0194] Fig. 10C is a flow diagram of an example method 1000C similar to the methods 1000A and 1000B, except that method 1000C includes block 1013 instead of block 1014.
[0195] Fig. 10D is a flow diagram of an example method WOOD similar to the methods 1000A, 1000B, and 1000C, except that method WOOD includes block 1014 instead of block 1013.
[0196] Fig. 11 illustrates an example method 1100, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
[0197] The method 1100 begins with block 1102, where the UE performs blocks 902, 904, and 906-920 (optional). At block 1102, the UE receives from the RAN a second reference LTM CU configuration and/or a second reference LTM DU configuration. At block 1104, the UE determines whether the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference LTM DU configuration. If the UE determines that the UE receives an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference LTC DU configuration at block 1104, the flow proceeds to block 1106. At block 1106, the UE replaces the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first LTM DU configuration with the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or second reference LTM DU configuration, respectively. In some implementations, the UE receives a message (e.g., an RRC reconfiguration message) including the indication, the second reference LTM CU configuration, and/or the second reference LTM DU configuration from the RAN.
[0198] Otherwise, if the UE determines that the UE does not receive an indication to replace the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference LTC DU configuration at block 1104, the flow proceeds to block 1108. At block 1108, the UE modifies the first reference LTM CU configuration and/or first reference DU configuration with the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or second reference LTM DU configuration, respectively.
[0199] In some implementations, the UE receives the second reference LTM CU configuration and/or the second reference LTM DU configuration in ways similar to receiving a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration as described for Eigs. 3-8B. [0200] Fig. 12 illustrates an example method 1200, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for performing a fast serving cell configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
[0201] The method 1200 begins at block 1202, where the UE communicates with a RAN via at least one serving cell, using a first serving DU configuration and a first serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880). At block 1204, the UE receives an LTM DU configuration configuring a first cell from the RAN (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619,
681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882). At block 1206, the UE receives an LTM command ordering the UE to perform a serving cell change to the first cell from the RAN (e.g., events 330, 380, 430, 480, 580, 530, 581, 582, 680, 630, 681, 682, 780, 730, 781, 782, 880, 830, 881, 882). At block 1208, the UE accesses the first cell in response to the LTM command (e.g., events 332, 380, 432, 480, 580, 532, 581, 582, 680, 632, 681,
682, 780, 732, 781, 782, 880, 832, 881, 882). At block 1210, the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the LTM DU configuration (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882). At block 1212, the UE determines whether to receive at least one LTM CU configuration. If the UE determines to receive at least one LTM CU configuration at block 1212, the flow proceeds to block 1214. At block 1214, the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the at least one LTM CU configuration after (e.g., in response to) receiving the LTM command (e.g., events 336, 380, 436, 480, 580, 536, 581, 582, 680, 636, 681, 682, 780, 736, 781, 782, 880, 836, 881, 882). Otherwise, if the UE determines not to receive at least one LTM CU configuration at block 1212, the flow proceeds to block 1216. At block 1216, the UE communicates with the RAN via the first cell using the serving CU configuration after (e.g., in response to) receiving the LTM command.
[0202] Fig. 13A illustrates an example method 1300A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing a LTM reference configuration and a non-reference LTM configuration with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
[0203] The method 1300A begins at block 1302, where the UE receives a reference LTM configuration and LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N from a RAN, where N is a positive integer and the LTM DU configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882). At block 1304, the UE receives a message from the RAN, where the message indicates to release at least one of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N. For example, the message is an RRC reconfiguration message. At block 1306, the UE releases at least one of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the message. At block 1308, the UE determines whether there is a LTM configuration (i.e., non-reference LTM configuration) left in the UE (i.e., the UE determines whether any nonreference LTM configuration is not released). If the UE determines that there is an LTM configuration left in the UE at block 1308, the flow proceeds to block 1310. At block 1310, the UE retains the reference LTM configuration. Otherwise, if the UE determines that there is no LTM configuration left in the UE at block 1308, the flow proceeds to block 1312. At block 1312, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration.
[0204] In some implementations, the reference LTM configuration includes a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, each of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes a (non-reference) LTM CU configuration and a (non-reference) LTM DU configuration.
[0205] Fig. 13B is a flow diagram of an example method 1300B similar to the method 1300A, except that method 1300B includes blocks 1305, 1307, and 1309 instead of blocks 1304 and 1306. At block 1305, the UE receives a message from the RAN, where the message indicating releasing the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N. At block 1307, the UE releases the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the message. At block 1309, the UE determines whether the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration. If the UE determines that the message does not include an indication to release the reference LTM configuration at block 1309, the flow proceeds to block 1310. Otherwise, if the UE determines that the message includes an indication to release the reference LTM configuration at block 1309, the flow proceeds to block 1312.
[0206] Fig. 14A illustrates an example method 1400A, which a UE (e.g., the UE 102) can implement, for managing LTM configurations (e.g., a LTM reference configuration and/or a non-reference LTM configuration) with a RAN (e.g., the DU 174, CU 172, base station 104 or 106, or RAN 105).
[0207] The method 1400A begins at block 1402, where the UE communicates with a RAN using a serving DU configuration and a serving CU configuration (e.g., events 302, 380, 402, 480, 502, 580, 602, 680, 702, 780, 802, 880). At block 1404, the UE receives a reference LTM configuration and/or LTM configuration(s) 1, .. N from the RAN, where N is a positive integer, and the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N configure cell(s) 1, ..., N for LTM (e.g., events 316, 318, 394, 380, 494, 480, 580, 594, 517, 519, 581, 582, 680, 694, 617, 619, 681, 682, 780, 794, 717, 719, 781, 782, 880, 894, 817, 819, 881, 882). At block 1405, the UE receives a message configuring the UE to transition to an idle state or inactive state from the RAN. For example, the message is an RRC release message. In some implementations, the message includes a suspend configuration (e.g., SuspendConfig IE) configuring the UE to transition to the inactive state (e.g., RRC_INACTIVE state). In other implementations, the message excludes the suspend configuration to configure the UE to transition to the idle state, (e.g., RRC_IDLE state).
[0208] At block 1406, the UE transitions to the idle state or inactive state in response to the message. At block 1408, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the idle or inactive state. The flow proceeds to block 1410 or block 1414 from block 1408. At block 1410, the UE releases the serving CU configuration in response to transitioning to the idle state. At block 1412, the UE releases the serving DU configuration in response to transitioning to the idle state. At block 1414, the UE retains the serving CU configuration or at least a portion of the serving CU configuration in response to transitioning to the inactive state. At block 1416, the UE retains the serving DU configuration or at least a portion of the serving DU configuration in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
[0209] In some implementations, the reference LTM configuration includes a reference LTM CU configuration and/or a reference LTM DU configuration. In some implementations, each of the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N includes a (non-reference) LTM CU configuration and a (non-reference) LTM DU configuration.
[0210] Fig. 14B is a flow diagram of an example method 1400B similar to the method 1400A, except that method 1400B includes blocks 1407 and 1411 instead of block 1408. The flow proceeds to block 1407 or block 1411 from block 1406. At block 1407, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the idle state. At block 1411, the UE retains the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N, in response to transitioning to the inactive state.
[0211] In some implementations, the UE in the inactive state initiates a state transition procedure (e.g., RRC connection resume procedure) with the RAN to transition to the connected state from the inactive state. In the state transition procedure, the UE transmits an RRC resume request message to the RAN and receives an RRC resume message in response. In response to the RRC resume message, the UE transitions to the connected state from the inactive state and transmits a RRC resume complete message to the RAN. Thus, in some such implementations, the RAN transmits an LTM command to the UE in the connected state to order the UE to perform a serving cell change to a cell configured in one of the retained LTM configuration(s) 1, ...,N. Alternatively, the RAN indicates to release the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in the RRC resume message. The UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the RRC resume message. In further alternative embodiments, after the UE transitions to the connected state, the RAN transmits, to the UE, an RRC reconfiguration message indicating to release the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N. The UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to the RRC reconfiguration message.
[0212] In other implementations, if the UE performs the state transition procedure on a cell different from a cell where the UE receives the message causing the UE to transition to the inactive state, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to initiating or performing the state transition procedure. Otherwise, if the UE performs the state transition procedure on the same as the cell where the UE receives the message causing the UE to transition to the inactive state, the UE retains the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N.
[0213] In yet other implementations, the UE releases the reference LTM configuration and/or the LTM configuration(s) 1, ..., N in response to initiating or performing the state transition procedure. In some implementations, the UE does so to simplify implementation of the UE because the UE does not check whether the cell where the UE performs the state transition procedure is the same as the cell where the UE receives the message transitioning the UE to the inactive state.
[0214] The following description may be applied to the description above.
[0215] Generally speaking, description for one of the above figures can apply to another of the above figures. Examples, implementations and methods described above can be combined, if there is no conflict. An event or block described above can be optional or omitted. For example, an event or block with dashed lines in the figures can be optional. In some implementations, “message” is used and can be replaced by “information element (IE)”, and vice versa. In some implementations, “IE” is used and can be replaced by “field”, and vice versa. In some implementations, “configuration” can be replaced by “configurations” or “configuration parameters”, and vice versa. In some implementations, the “LTM command” can be replaced by “serving cell change command”, “Layer 1/Layer 2 switching command”, “lower layer switching command” or “lower layer serving cell change command”. In some implementations, “some” means “one or more”. In some implementations, “at least one” means “one or more”. In some implementations, the “DU configuration” can be replaced by “cell group configuration”. In some implementations, the “cell index” can be replaced with “serving cell index”, “LTM cell index”, “special cell (SpCell) index”, “PCell index” or “PSCell index”.
[0216] A user device in which the techniques of this disclosure can be implemented (e.g., the UE 102) can be any suitable device capable of wireless communications such as a smartphone, a tablet computer, a laptop computer, a mobile gaming console, a point-of-sale (POS) terminal, a health monitoring device, a drone, a camera, a media- streaming dongle or another personal media device, a wearable device such as a smartwatch, a wireless hotspot, a femtocell, or a broadband router. Further, the user device in some cases may be embedded in an electronic system such as the head unit of a vehicle or an advanced driver assistance system (ADAS). Still further, the user device can operate as an intemet-of-things (loT) device or a mobile-internet device (MID). Depending on the type, the user device can include one or more general-purpose processors, a computer-readable memory, a user interface, one or more network interfaces, one or more sensors, etc.
[0217] Certain embodiments are described in this disclosure as including logic or a number of components or modules. Modules may can be software modules (e.g., code, or machine- readable instructions stored on non-transitory machine-readable medium) or hardware modules. A hardware module is a tangible unit capable of performing certain operations and may be configured or arranged in a certain manner. A hardware module can comprise dedicated circuitry or logic that is permanently configured (e.g., as a special-purpose processor, such as a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a digital signal processor (DSP), etc.) to perform certain operations. A hardware module may also comprise programmable logic or circuitry (e.g., as encompassed within a general-purpose processor or other programmable processor) that is temporarily configured by software to perform certain operations. The decision to implement a hardware module in dedicated and permanently configured circuitry, or in temporarily configured circuitry (e.g., configured by software) may be driven by cost and time considerations.
[0218] When implemented in software, the techniques can be provided as part of the operating system, a library used by multiple applications, a particular software application, etc. The software can be executed by one or more general-purpose processors or one or more special-purpose processors.
[0219] Upon reading this disclosure, those of skill in the art will appreciate still additional and alternative structural and functional designs for handling mobility between base stations through the principles disclosed herein. Thus, while particular embodiments and applications have been illustrated and described, it is to be understood that the disclosed embodiments are not limited to the precise construction and components disclosed herein. Various modifications, changes and variations, which will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art, may be made in the arrangement, operation and details of the method and apparatus disclosed herein without departing from the spirit and scope defined in the appended claims.

Claims

What is claimed is:
1. A method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) DU configuration and a reference LTM CU configuration; and communicating, at the UE, with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising: receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node after receiving the reference LTM DU configuration and the reference LTM CU configuration, an LTM command to perform a serving cell change from a first cell to a second cell.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein: the communicating with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration is via the second cell.
4. The method of any one of the preceding claims, further comprising: receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a non-reference LTM DU configuration based on the reference LTM DU configuration and a non-reference LTM CU configuration based on the reference LTM CU configuration.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the communicating with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration includes: communicating with a DU of the distributed RAN node using the non-reference LTM DU configuration based on the reference LTM DU configuration.
6. The method of claim 4 or 5, wherein the communicating with the distributed RAN node using at least a portion of the reference LTM DU configuration and at least a portion of the reference LTM CU configuration includes: communicating with a CU of the distributed RAN node using the non-reference LTM CU configuration based on the reference LTM CU configuration.
7. The method of any one of the preceding claims, wherein: the receiving the reference LTM DU configuration and the reference LTM CU configuration includes receiving a single message including the reference LTM DU configuration and the reference LTM CU configuration.
8. A method implemented in a user equipment (UE), the method comprising: communicating, at the UE, with a distributed radio access network (RAN) node according to a serving distributed unit (DU) configuration and a serving centralized unit (CU) configuration; receiving, at the UE and from the distributed RAN node, a reference lower layer triggered mobility (LTM) configuration; and releasing, at the UE and in response to transitioning to an inactive state or an idle state, the reference LTM configuration.
9. The method of claim 8, further comprising: retaining, responsive to transitioning to the inactive state, at least a portion of the serving CU configuration.
10. The method of claim 8 or 9, further comprising: retaining, responsive to transitioning to the inactive state, at least a portion of the serving DU configuration.
11. The method of any one of claims 8-10, further comprising: releasing, responsive to transitioning to the idle state, the serving CU configuration.
12. The method of any one of claims 8-11, further comprising: releasing, responsive to transitioning to the idle state, the serving DU configuration.
13. The method of any one of claims 8-12, further comprising: receiving, at the UE, a non-reference LTM configuration.
14. The method of claim 13, further comprising: releasing, at the UE, the non-reference LTM configuration responsive to transitioning to the inactive state or the idle state.
15. An apparatus, operating as a user equipment (UE), comprising processing hardware and configured to implement a method according to any one of the preceding claims.
EP24714070.0A 2023-02-16 2024-02-15 Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment Pending EP4649727A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202363446329P 2023-02-16 2023-02-16
PCT/US2024/015922 WO2024173635A1 (en) 2023-02-16 2024-02-15 Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP4649727A1 true EP4649727A1 (en) 2025-11-19

Family

ID=90468493

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP24714070.0A Pending EP4649727A1 (en) 2023-02-16 2024-02-15 Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4649727A1 (en)
CN (1) CN120752960A (en)
WO (1) WO2024173635A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2024527465A (en) * 2021-06-17 2024-07-25 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エルエム エリクソン(パブル) Method and network node for suspend-resume for L1/L2-centric inter-cell mobility configuration - Patents.com
US20240334269A1 (en) * 2021-08-03 2024-10-03 Nokia Technologies Oy Configuration enhancements for an intra-gnb-du intra-frequency l1/l2 inter cell change

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN120752960A (en) 2025-10-03
WO2024173635A1 (en) 2024-08-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4573801A1 (en) Managing radio link control protocol operation for a fast serving cell change
WO2024130053A1 (en) Managing a lower layer triggerred mobility at a user equipment
EP4588311A1 (en) Managing communication failures in a disaggregated base station
EP4649727A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations at a user equipment
EP4649729A1 (en) Configuring lower layer triggered mobility
EP4649726A1 (en) Performing a fast serving cell change based on lower layer triggered mobility (ltm)
EP4631311A1 (en) Enabling a fast cell change across distributed units
EP4643568A1 (en) Managing serving cell change procedures for a user equipment
EP4649708A1 (en) Managing a fast serving cell change in a radio access network
EP4635220A1 (en) Enabling a fast cell change with low overhead signaling
WO2024168099A1 (en) Managing configurations for fast serving cell changes
EP4616638A1 (en) Managing configurations for lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025096315A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility configuration and reconfiguration
WO2025059611A1 (en) Generating a lower layer triggered cell switch configuration
WO2025072577A1 (en) Managing mobility for a user equipment
WO2025064965A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility
WO2024173904A1 (en) Managing lower layer triggered mobility configurations
WO2024130055A1 (en) Managing a lower layer triggerred mobility at a disaggregated base station
WO2025117402A1 (en) Managing carrier aggregation for lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025151568A1 (en) Managing configurations for lower layer triggered mobility
WO2025024863A1 (en) Managing early timing advance acquisition
WO2025117401A1 (en) Managing uplink synchronization in a random access channel-less cell switch
WO2024073105A1 (en) Managing data communication in a serving cell change scenario
WO2024173288A1 (en) Managing user equipment access to a cell in a fast serving cell change
WO2025071952A1 (en) Device and method for managing resources for lower layer triggered mobility serving cell change

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: UNKNOWN

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE INTERNATIONAL PUBLICATION HAS BEEN MADE

PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20250814

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC ME MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR